WO2024037542A1 - Touch input method, system, electronic device, and storage medium - Google Patents

Touch input method, system, electronic device, and storage medium Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2024037542A1
WO2024037542A1 PCT/CN2023/113141 CN2023113141W WO2024037542A1 WO 2024037542 A1 WO2024037542 A1 WO 2024037542A1 CN 2023113141 W CN2023113141 W CN 2023113141W WO 2024037542 A1 WO2024037542 A1 WO 2024037542A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
touch
operating system
window
application
event
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2023/113141
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
段鹏
龚作豪
董刚刚
文平
王威
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2024037542A1 publication Critical patent/WO2024037542A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0481Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] based on specific properties of the displayed interaction object or a metaphor-based environment, e.g. interaction with desktop elements like windows or icons, or assisted by a cursor's changing behaviour or appearance
    • G06F3/04812Interaction techniques based on cursor appearance or behaviour, e.g. being affected by the presence of displayed objects
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F3/00Input arrangements for transferring data to be processed into a form capable of being handled by the computer; Output arrangements for transferring data from processing unit to output unit, e.g. interface arrangements
    • G06F3/01Input arrangements or combined input and output arrangements for interaction between user and computer
    • G06F3/048Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI]
    • G06F3/0487Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser
    • G06F3/0488Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures
    • G06F3/04886Interaction techniques based on graphical user interfaces [GUI] using specific features provided by the input device, e.g. functions controlled by the rotation of a mouse with dual sensing arrangements, or of the nature of the input device, e.g. tap gestures based on pressure sensed by a digitiser using a touch-screen or digitiser, e.g. input of commands through traced gestures by partitioning the display area of the touch-screen or the surface of the digitising tablet into independently controllable areas, e.g. virtual keyboards or menus
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/451Execution arrangements for user interfaces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/44Arrangements for executing specific programs
    • G06F9/455Emulation; Interpretation; Software simulation, e.g. virtualisation or emulation of application or operating system execution engines
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06FELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
    • G06F9/00Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units
    • G06F9/06Arrangements for program control, e.g. control units using stored programs, i.e. using an internal store of processing equipment to receive or retain programs
    • G06F9/46Multiprogramming arrangements
    • G06F9/54Interprogram communication

Definitions

  • the present application belongs to the field of device control technology, and in particular relates to a touch input method, system, electronic device and storage medium.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a touch input method, system, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium, which can solve the problem of non-universal operating methods in existing device control technologies when running some applications across systems. , thereby reducing the problem of user experience.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a touch input method.
  • the method is applied to an electronic device.
  • the electronic device is equipped with a first operating system and a second operating system.
  • the first operating system and the second operating system are both equipped with a first operating system and a second operating system.
  • the second operating system is different; the method includes:
  • the first operating system receives a user's touch operation on a preset application; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
  • the first operating system responds to the touch operation and sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system;
  • the second operating system generates an operation instruction corresponding to the touch event
  • the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
  • the touch input method provided by the embodiment of the present application can run a preset application across operating systems in the first operating system, and the user initiates a touch control for the preset application in the first operating system.
  • the corresponding touch event can be generated through the first touch module of the first operating system and transmitted to the second operating system, and the touch event can be converted through the second touch module in the second operating system to generate a
  • the operation instructions recognized by the second operating system allow the preset application running in the second operating system to execute the operation instructions and generate corresponding response results, thereby realizing interoperability of touch operations across systems.
  • corresponding touch modules are configured in different operating systems, and the touch operations are converted across systems through the touch modules, so that it is possible to generate a system that supports cross-system operation.
  • the preset application-identified operation instructions improve the consistency of cross-system operations, thereby improving the expansion of the application ecosystem within the operating system and meeting the user needs.
  • the first operating system and the second operating system are any of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system. .
  • the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third click on any area in the preset application.
  • Three-touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third click on any area in the preset application.
  • the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type
  • the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
  • the first operating system determines the window type of the target window, and generates a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first touch operation in the preset time.
  • the window operated in the application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation.
  • the window type is a parent window type or a child window type
  • the operation type is closing the window, exiting the application, or performing application management.
  • the touch operation is a second touch operation of a multi-contact type
  • the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
  • the first operating system generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation and transmits the multi-touch event to the second operating system; the multi-touch event is included in the The first touch coordinates and touch time of each contact point in the first operating system;
  • the first touch module sends the touch event to the second touch module in the container running the second operating system, and the second touch module generates the touch event.
  • the operation instructions corresponding to the event include:
  • the second operating system performs coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
  • the first operating system generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation and transmits the multi-touch event to the second Touch module, including:
  • the first operating system monitors touch operations initiated by the user
  • the first operating system recognizes that the touch operation is a second touch operation, it performs legal verification on the second touch operation;
  • the first operating system recognizes that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, it generates the multi-touch event and sends the multi-touch event to the second operating system. .
  • the second operating system performs coordinate transformation on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
  • the second operating system performs complete verification on the multi-touch event
  • the second operating system If the second operating system recognizes that the multi-touch event passes complete verification, it performs coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event to determine each of the first touch coordinates.
  • the corresponding second touch coordinates in the second operating system; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system and the location of the preset application in the first operating system.
  • the size of the corresponding second window in the second operating system and the first touch coordinates are determined; the first window is the mapping window of the second window under the first operating system;
  • the second operating system generates the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
  • the second operating system generates the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates, including:
  • the second operating system determines a target window for a required operation in the preset application, and generates a second operation instruction that acts on the target window based on the second contact point coordinates.
  • the touch operation includes a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application
  • the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
  • the first operating system generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and sends the cursor displacement touch event to the second operating system;
  • the cursor displacement touch event includes The third touch coordinate corresponding to the above-mentioned touch operation;
  • the second operating system generates operation instructions corresponding to the touch event, including:
  • the second operating system identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type;
  • the second operating system After the second operating system generates the operation instruction corresponding to the touch event, it also includes:
  • the first operating system receives feedback from the second operating system regarding the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate;
  • the soft keyboard is enabled.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first operating system does not open the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is a non-editing area type.
  • the first operating system generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and sends the cursor displacement touch event to the second Operating system, including:
  • the first operating system monitors the touch operation initiated by the user
  • the first operating system recognizes that the touch operation is a third touch operation, it performs legal verification on the third touch operation;
  • the first operating system recognizes that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, it generates a click recognition event
  • the first operating system In response to the click recognition event, the first operating system identifies the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determines the click type and the third touch coordinates based on the click type and the third touch coordinates.
  • the generated cursor displacement event is sent to the second operating system.
  • the second operating system identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type.
  • the second operating system receives the cursor displacement event sent by the first operating system, and updates the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third touch coordinates;
  • the second operating system identifies the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determines the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style.
  • receiving a user's touch operation on a preset application in the first operating system further includes:
  • the first operating system receives a user's startup operation for the preset application
  • the first operating system initiates an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system;
  • the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
  • the second operating system responds to the application startup instruction, runs the preset application, and feeds back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application in the first operating system;
  • the first operating system generates the operation interface through the proxy application.
  • inventions of the present application provide a touch input system.
  • the touch input system includes a first operating system and a second operating system; the first operating system is different from the second operating system. ;
  • the first operating system includes:
  • a touch operation receiving module configured to receive a user's touch operation on a preset application in the first operating system; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
  • a first touch module configured to respond to a touch operation and send a touch event generated based on the touch operation to a second touch module in the second operating system;
  • the second operating system includes:
  • the second touch module is used to generate operation instructions corresponding to the touch event
  • An operation instruction execution unit is used to execute the operation instruction through the preset application.
  • the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third-party click on any area in the preset application. Touch operation.
  • the first operating system and the second operating system are any one of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system.
  • the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type
  • the first touch module is specifically configured to: determine a window type of a target window, and generate a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first touch event. Control the window operated in the preset application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation;
  • the second touch module also includes a window management unit
  • the window management unit is used to generate a first operation instruction for the target window.
  • the window type is a parent window type or a child window type
  • the operation type is closing the window, exiting the application, or performing application management.
  • the first touch module further includes: a touch management unit and a touch window management unit;
  • the touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when the touch operation is recognized as a first touch operation, send the first touch operation to the Touch window management unit;
  • the touch window management unit is used to establish a cascade relationship between each operation window in the preset application
  • the touch window management unit is also configured to determine the window type of the target window according to the first touch operation.
  • the touch operation is a multi-touch type second touch operation
  • the first touch module is specifically configured to: generate a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation, and transmit the multi-touch event to the second operating system in the second operating system.
  • Touch module includes the first touch coordinates and touch time of each touch point in the first operating system;
  • the second touch module is specifically configured to perform coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
  • the first touch module includes: a touch management unit and a touch event conversion unit;
  • the touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is the second touch operation, send the second touch operation to the touch screen.
  • Control event conversion unit
  • the touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the second touch operation
  • the touch event conversion unit is also configured to generate the multi-touch event if it is recognized that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, and send the multi-touch event to all The second touch module in the second operating system.
  • the second touch module includes: a multi-touch management unit and a touch window conversion unit;
  • the multi-touch management unit is used to complete verification of the multi-touch event, and when it is recognized that the multi-touch event passes the complete verification, send the multi-touch event. to the touch window conversion unit;
  • the touch window conversion unit is used to perform coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event, and determine the second touch corresponding to each of the first touch coordinates in the second operating system. Coordinates; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system and the corresponding second window of the preset application in the second operating system. The size and the first touch coordinates are determined; the first window is a mapping window for the second window under the first operating system;
  • the touch window conversion unit is also used to generate the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
  • control window conversion unit is also used to:
  • the touch operation is a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application
  • the first touch module is specifically configured to: generate a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and send the cursor displacement touch event to the second operating system in the second operating system.
  • Touch module the cursor displacement touch event includes the third touch coordinate corresponding to the touch operation;
  • the second touch module is specifically configured to: identify the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generate a third operation instruction according to the area type;
  • the second touch module is also configured to: send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system;
  • the first touch module is also configured to enable the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is an editable area type.
  • the first touch module is further configured to not open the soft keyboard when it is detected that the area type is a non-editing area type.
  • the first touch module includes: a touch management unit, a touch event conversion unit, and an input touch detection unit;
  • the touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is a third touch operation, send the third touch operation to the Touch event conversion unit;
  • the touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the third touch operation, and when it is detected that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, the input touch detection unit Send a click recognition event generated based on the third touch operation;
  • the input touch detection unit is configured to, in response to the click recognition event, identify the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determine the click type and the third touch coordinate based on the click type and the third touch coordinate.
  • the cursor displacement event generated by the three touch coordinates is sent to the second touch module in the second operating system.
  • the first touch module further includes: an input state recognition unit;
  • the input touch detection unit is also configured to send click gesture information to the input state recognition unit in the first touch module, so that the input state recognition unit monitors the feedback from the second touch module. Waiting states for zone types;
  • the input state recognition unit is configured to receive the area type fed back by the second touch module, and when detecting that the area type is an editable area type, enable the soft keyboard.
  • the second touch module includes: a click input subunit and a cursor classification unit;
  • the click input subunit is configured to receive the cursor displacement event sent by the first touch module of the first operating system, and update the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third Touch coordinates;
  • the cursor classification unit is used to identify the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determine the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style;
  • the cursor classification unit is also used to send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system.
  • the first operating system includes: a startup operation receiving unit, an application startup unit, and an interface display unit;
  • the second operating system includes: an interface feedback unit;
  • a startup operation receiving unit configured to receive a user's startup operation for the preset application in the first operating system
  • An application startup unit configured to initiate an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
  • An interface feedback unit configured to respond to the application startup instruction, run the preset application in the second operating system, and feed back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application;
  • An interface display unit is configured to generate the operation interface in the first operating system through the proxy application.
  • embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, including: a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the processor executes The computer program implements the touch input method described in any one of the above first aspects.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program, which is characterized in that when the computer program is executed by a processor, any of the above-mentioned aspects of the first aspect is implemented.
  • a method of touch input
  • embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, which when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to perform the touch input method described in any one of the above first aspects.
  • embodiments of the present application provide a chip system, including a processor.
  • the processor is coupled to a memory.
  • the processor executes a computer program stored in the memory to implement touch control as described in any one of the first aspects. Input method.
  • Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 2 is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of touch operations that can be transmitted between the existing Android system and Linux system;
  • Figure 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of a desktop application of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of cross-system data transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 7 is an implementation flow chart of a touch input method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 8 is a specific implementation flow chart for running a preset application provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of an operation interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of different touch operations provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 11 is a data flow diagram for converting different types of touch operations into operation instructions provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 12 is an implementation flow chart of a method for edge gesture type touch input according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of multiple edge gestures provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 14 is a comparison chart of the responses of different window types to the same edge gesture provided by this application.
  • Figure 15 is an implementation flow chart of a method for multi-contact type touch input according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of a multi-contact type touch operation provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of canceling response to a multi-contact operation provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 18 is an implementation flow chart of a touch input method for clicking on any area in a preset application according to an embodiment of the present application
  • Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a cursor style provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of opening the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 21 is a schematic diagram of closing the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 22 is a structural block diagram of a touch input device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 23 is a structural block diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the term “if” may be interpreted as “when” or “once” or “in response to determining” or “in response to detecting” depending on the context. ". Similarly, the phrase “if determined” or “if [the described condition or event] is detected” may be interpreted, depending on the context, to mean “once determined” or “in response to a determination” or “once the [described condition or event] is detected ]” or “in response to detection of [the described condition or event]”.
  • the touch input method provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied to mobile phones, tablet computers, wearable devices, vehicle-mounted devices, augmented reality (AR)/virtual reality (VR) devices, notebook computers, and super mobile devices.
  • AR augmented reality
  • VR virtual reality
  • PDA personal digital assistant
  • the touch input method can be applied to tablet computers with touch functions.
  • the embodiments of this application do not place any restrictions on the specific types of electronic devices.
  • the electronic device may be a station (ST) in a WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) device, handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, computing device or connected to Wireless modems, other processing devices, computers, laptops, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, and/or other devices for communicating over wireless systems and next generation communication systems, such as in 5G networks Mobile terminals or mobile terminals in the future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) network, etc.
  • PLMN Public Land Mobile Network
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc.
  • a processor 110 an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display
  • the sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
  • the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, some components may be separated, or some components may be arranged differently.
  • the components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
  • the processor 110 may include one or more processing units.
  • the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc.
  • application processor application processor, AP
  • modem processor graphics processing unit
  • GPU graphics processing unit
  • image signal processor image signal processor
  • ISP image signal processor
  • controller video codec
  • digital signal processor digital signal processor
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • baseband processor baseband processor
  • neural network processor neural-network processing unit
  • the controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
  • the processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data.
  • the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
  • processor 110 may include one or more interfaces.
  • Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
  • I2C integrated circuit
  • I2S integrated circuit built-in audio
  • PCM pulse code modulation
  • UART universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter
  • MIPI mobile industry processor interface
  • GPIO general-purpose input/output
  • SIM subscriber identity module
  • USB universal serial bus
  • the I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL).
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses.
  • the processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the I2S interface can be used for audio communication.
  • processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses.
  • the processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 .
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals.
  • the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface.
  • the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
  • the UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication.
  • the bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. it will be The transmitted data is converted between serial and parallel communication.
  • a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 .
  • the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function.
  • the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
  • the MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 .
  • MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc.
  • the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
  • the GPIO interface can be configured through software.
  • the GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal.
  • the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc.
  • the GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc.
  • the USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
  • the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
  • the charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger.
  • the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger.
  • the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 .
  • the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
  • the power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110.
  • the power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, the wireless communication module 160, and the like.
  • the power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters.
  • the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 .
  • the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
  • the wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
  • Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals.
  • Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 .
  • the mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation.
  • the mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation.
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 .
  • at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
  • a modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator.
  • the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal.
  • the demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal.
  • the demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing.
  • the application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194.
  • the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In other embodiments, adjust The modem and demodulation processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
  • the wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites.
  • WLAN wireless local area networks
  • System global navigation satellite system, GNSS
  • frequency modulation frequency modulation, FM
  • near field communication technology near field communication, NFC
  • infrared technology infrared, IR
  • the wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module.
  • the wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 .
  • the wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
  • the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology.
  • the wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc.
  • the GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
  • GPS global positioning system
  • GLONASS global navigation satellite system
  • BDS Beidou navigation satellite system
  • QZSS quasi-zenith satellite system
  • SBAS satellite based augmentation systems
  • the electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering.
  • Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information.
  • the above-mentioned display screen 194 can specifically display the generated detection report, so that the user can view the detection report through the display screen 194 .
  • the display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc.
  • Display 194 includes a display panel.
  • the display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode).
  • LED organic light-emitting diode
  • AMOLED organic light-emitting diode
  • FLED flexible light-emitting diode
  • Miniled MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Display 194 may include a touch panel as well as other input devices.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
  • the ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
  • Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video.
  • the object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element.
  • the photosensitive element can be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor.
  • CMOS complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor
  • the photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal.
  • ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing.
  • DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals.
  • the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
  • Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video.
  • Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • MPEG moving picture experts group
  • MPEG2 MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
  • NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. It draws on the structure of biological neural networks, such as The human brain transmits patterns between neurons, processes input information quickly, and can continuously learn by itself. Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
  • the external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100.
  • the external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
  • Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions.
  • the internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area.
  • the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.).
  • the storage data area may store data created during use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.).
  • the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc.
  • the processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
  • the electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
  • the audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
  • Speaker 170A also called “speaker” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls.
  • the above-mentioned speaker 170A can be used to output prompt information to notify the user of the parts that need to be contacted with the electronic scale.
  • Receiver 170B also called “earpiece” is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals.
  • the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
  • Microphone 170C also called “microphone” or “microphone” is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C.
  • the electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
  • the headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones.
  • the headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
  • OMTP open mobile terminal platform
  • CTIA Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA
  • the pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals.
  • the pressure sensor 180A can be disposed on the display screen 194.
  • the electronic device can obtain the user's weight through the pressure sensor 180A.
  • pressure sensors 180A such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc.
  • a capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material.
  • the electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A.
  • touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
  • the gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 .
  • the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes ie, x, y, and z axes
  • the gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake.
  • the gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
  • Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
  • Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor.
  • the electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect opening and closing of the flip holster.
  • the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
  • the acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
  • Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance.
  • Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
  • Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode.
  • the light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode.
  • the electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode.
  • Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 .
  • the electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power.
  • the proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness.
  • the electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures.
  • the ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
  • Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints.
  • the electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
  • Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature.
  • the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
  • Touch sensor 180K also known as "touch device”.
  • the touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194.
  • the touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen”.
  • the touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K.
  • the touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type.
  • Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 .
  • the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 at a location different from that of the display screen 194 .
  • Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals.
  • the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone.
  • the audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function.
  • the application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
  • the buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc.
  • Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button.
  • the electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
  • the motor 191 can generate vibration prompts.
  • the motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback.
  • touch operations for different applications can correspond to different vibration feedback effects.
  • the motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 .
  • Different application scenarios such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.
  • the touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
  • the indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card.
  • the SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 .
  • the electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, N is a positive integer greater than 1.
  • SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards.
  • the SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards.
  • the electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calls and data communications.
  • the electronic device 100 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card.
  • the eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
  • the software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture.
  • This embodiment of the present invention takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
  • Figure 2 is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device according to the embodiment of the present application.
  • the layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor.
  • the layers communicate through software interfaces.
  • the Android system is divided into four layers. From top to bottom, they are the application layer, the application framework layer, the system layer of the Android runtime (Android runtime), and the kernel layer.
  • the application layer can include a series of application packages.
  • the application package can include applications such as camera, calendar, map, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message, mailbox, WeChat, WPS, etc.
  • the application framework layer provides application programming interfaces (application programming) for applications in the application layer.
  • API application interface
  • programming framework includes some predefined functions.
  • the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
  • a window manager is used to manage window programs.
  • the window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
  • Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications.
  • Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
  • the view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc.
  • a view system can be used to build applications.
  • the display interface can be composed of one or more views.
  • a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
  • Telephone managers are used to provide communication functions of electronic devices. For example, call status management (including connected, hung up, etc.).
  • the resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
  • the notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction.
  • the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc.
  • the notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
  • Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
  • the core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
  • the application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines.
  • the virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files.
  • the virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
  • the system layer can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
  • surface manager surface manager
  • media libraries Media Libraries
  • 3D graphics processing libraries for example: OpenGL ES
  • 2D graphics engines for example: SGL
  • the surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
  • the media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc.
  • the media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
  • the 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition and layer processing.
  • 2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
  • the kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software.
  • the kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
  • the following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
  • the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer.
  • the kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored in the kernel layer.
  • the application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation and the control corresponding to the click operation as a camera application icon control as an example, the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
  • mobile terminals such as smart phones, smart tablets and other portable electronic devices
  • applications can install different types of applications on smart terminals.
  • the application can meet various needs in daily life and work, such as installing photo editing software on smartphones, beautifying and splicing images in the gallery, and editing captured videos on smartphones. , add background music, etc. to meet the needs of editing short videos anytime and anywhere.
  • users' demands for applications continue to increase, and users' demands for applications are also developing in the direction of specialization and complexity
  • applications developed based on mobile terminals can no longer meet the needs of users, and users need to use specialized For higher-level tasks, it is often necessary to use a computer.
  • the operating system of the mobile terminal can be the Android system.
  • the Linux system can be run on the mobile terminal through an emulator to expand the application ecosystem of the mobile terminal.
  • the Linux operating system and the mobile terminal operating system (such as Android system) are both built based on the container structure, they are compatible and compatible with the Android system.
  • Linux applications offer the possibility of implementation.
  • the modules of the Linux system are inconsistent with the modules on the mobile terminal, there is a certain difference between the way users operate the Linux system (mainly keyboard and mouse) and the way they operate the Android system (mainly touch).
  • the Linux system is mainly based on keyboard and mouse operations, supplemented by touch operations, while the mobile terminal is mainly dominated by touch operations, supplemented by soft keyboard operations. Therefore, some touch operations on the mobile terminal It is invalid for the Linux system (that is, there is no corresponding touch gesture), which results in a large number of touch operations that cannot be recognized by the Linux system when users run applications based on the Linux system on mobile terminals. It reduces the user's operating efficiency and requires re-adaptation to the operating habits of the Linux system, which greatly increases the learning cost required for applications built based on the Linux system.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of touch operations that can be transmitted between the existing Android system and the Linux system.
  • the mobile terminal runs an Android system, and different types of touch operations can be initiated in the Android system, such as a click selection operation to select a certain display object, and a gesture operation initiated against the edge of the mobile terminal display screen. Or when clicking on the editable area, the text input operation of the soft keyboard is automatically evoked.
  • the existing simulation technology of running the Linux system in the Android system cannot recognize the touch operation in the Android system.
  • the Windows system on the Android system there is also the problem that the above touch operations cannot be recognized.
  • the touch input method is executed by an electronic device.
  • the electronic device includes but is not limited to: a smart phone, Tablets, smart watches, computers, laptops and other electronic devices that can receive touch operations initiated by users.
  • the electronic device is described using a smart tablet as an example. If the electronic device is a smartphone or other electronic device, the implementation method is exactly the same as that of the smart tablet. You may refer to the specific implementation process of the smart tablet. .
  • the smart tablet is equipped with a touch screen, can receive touch operations initiated by the user through the touch screen, and realize conversion and transmission of the received touch operations through the built-in first touch module, so that based on another operation
  • the preset application built by the system identifies and performs corresponding response operations.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic structural diagram of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the smart tablet provided by this embodiment includes at least the following layers: application layer, application framework layer, system layer, hardware abstraction layer, kernel layer and physical layer.
  • the above-mentioned application layer is specifically used to run various applications, including system-built-in applications (such as system settings) and custom-installed applications.
  • the above-mentioned application layer includes a proxy application, which is used to realize data interaction between the first operating system (i.e., the native operating system of the smart tablet) and the second operating system (i.e., another operating system running in simulation), For example, a preset application built based on the second operating system can be transmitted through the above-mentioned proxy application.
  • the above-mentioned cross-system application data transmission process specifically includes: through applications that support the displayable X11 protocol and wayland protocol, the window, display
  • the display module in the second operating system such as Linux system
  • the display data is transmitted to the above-mentioned proxy application, and then the proxy application calls the application framework layer in the first operating system (such as Android system).
  • the relevant module completes the display, thereby being able to generate an application window for cross-system applications within the first operating system and the ability to display images in the window.
  • the agent application is specifically responsible for interface display, window management, application startup and other related functions of applications running across systems, and specifically includes the following modules: main execution module, application execution module, and service module.
  • the main execution module is responsible for generating desktop icons based on cross-system applications in the desktop, such as Linux desktop icons.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a desktop application of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, the desktop of the smart tablet displays all executable applications, such as library application 51, memo application 52, etc., and also displays applications based on other operating systems, such as document editing application 53.
  • the icon generation of the document editing application 53 can be generated through the main execution module in the above-mentioned proxy application.
  • a mark namely mark 54
  • the application execution module is specifically used to generate a window interface of an application program built based on the second operating system; and the service module is specifically used to manage and display images of the above-generated window interface.
  • the above-mentioned application framework layer includes an application framework for basic functions in the smart tablet, namely Framework 1, and an extension framework for implementing extended functions, namely Framework 2.
  • the above-mentioned native application framework contains different system modules, such as wireless communication module, Bluetooth communication module, multimedia playback module, etc.
  • a multi-window display module can be configured in the extension frame to enable application windows of different applications to be displayed in the same interface of the smart tablet at the same time; the extension frame also includes a first touch module, which is specifically used to realize cross-platform display. Recognition and response of touch operations between systems.
  • the second operating system can be run through the image container, that is, the second operating system is built in the image container.
  • the simulated operating system also includes an application layer, an application framework layer, and a system layer. It should be noted that the above-mentioned image container running the second operating system can be deployed in the cloud server or locally on the smart tablet.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of cross-system data transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the image container running the second operating system is deployed on the smart tablet.
  • the above-mentioned image container and the first operating system of the smart tablet share the kernel layer in the smart tablet and The physical layer is used to complete the data transmission between the two operating systems through the proxy application. That is, in this case, the first operating system and the second operating system are both installed in the same electronic device.
  • the image container running the second operating system is deployed on the cloud server, that is, the first operating system and the second operating system are respectively installed in different electronic devices.
  • the required data can be generated through the proxy application in the first operating system and sent to the cloud server through the physical layer in the smart tablet to be received by the mirror container in the cloud service location;
  • the data generated in the image container can also be sent through the cloud server. to the smart tablet, and is received by the physical layer in the smart tablet and passed to the agent application in the smart tablet, thus realizing cross-system data transmission.
  • the application framework layer of the image container running the second operating system is configured with a second touch module.
  • the second touch module can receive the information sent by the first touch module and convert it into information that can be processed based on the second touch module.
  • Operation instructions identified by applications built by the operating system; the application layer in the image container runs applications built based on the second operating system, that is, subsequent default applications, and the relevant operation windows can be applied to the first operating system through a proxy Internal display enables cross-system application operations and expands the application ecosystem within the smart tablet.
  • FIG. 7 shows an implementation flow chart of a touch input method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The details are as follows:
  • the first operating system receives the user's touch operation on the preset application; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
  • the first operating system in response to the touch operation, sends the touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system through the first touch module in the first operating system.
  • the smart tablet is built based on the first operating system, that is, the first operating system is specifically the native operating system of the smart tablet.
  • the first operating system is specifically the Android operating system. , Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system.
  • the first operating system can also be other operating systems that support touch operations, and the first operating system is not limited here.
  • the smart tablet displays application icons corresponding to the default applications built based on other operating systems (ie, the second operating system). The user can click the application icons to start the above-mentioned default applications.
  • the above-mentioned document editing application 53 is an application built based on the Linux system (ie, the above-mentioned default application). The user can click the above-mentioned document editing application 53 to start the default application.
  • the smart tablet After detecting that the user needs to launch a preset application that runs across the system, the smart tablet can generate an operation interface corresponding to the preset application, and the user can initiate a touch operation on the preset application in the operation interface.
  • FIG. 8 shows a specific implementation flow chart of running a preset application provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the embodiment of the present application compared with the embodiment shown in Figure 7, the embodiment of the present application also includes S801 ⁇ S804 before S701.
  • the specific description is as follows:
  • the first operating system receives a user-initiated startup operation for the preset application.
  • different types of applications are installed in the smart tablet, including default applications built based on another operating system.
  • a proxy application running in the application layer of the smart tablet.
  • the main execution module of the proxy application can generate the application icon of the preset application in the desktop of the smart tablet, such as the document editing application 53 in Figure 5.
  • the smart tablet detects that the user clicks on the above-mentioned document editing application 53, it recognizes that the user initiated the above-mentioned startup operation.
  • the first operating system sends an application startup instruction to the second operating system through the proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the default application.
  • a proxy application is installed in the first operating system of the smart tablet. After receiving the startup instruction for the default application, the proxy application can send information about the default application to the container where the second operating system is installed. Start the instruction to run the above-mentioned preset application in the container of the second operating system.
  • the agent application can send the above-mentioned startup command to the above-mentioned container running the second operating system through the common kernel layer; if the container is configured in a device other than the smart tablet, Other devices (such as cloud servers) generate communication data packets carrying the communication address of the cloud server and send them to the cloud server through the established communication link with the cloud server to notify the cloud server to run the above-mentioned preset application. .
  • Other devices such as cloud servers
  • the startup command sent by the proxy application carries the application identifier of the default application that needs to be started.
  • the application identifier can be the application name of the default application (such as Ligtroom, Photoshop CS4, etc.), or it can be After receiving the application number of the preset application (such as LR10245, PS23568, etc.), the container running the second operating system can extract the application ID contained in it and compare it with the application ID of each existing local application. Matching is performed, and the existing application corresponding to the application identifier associated with the startup instruction is identified as the above-mentioned default application.
  • the above-mentioned application identification can also be coordinate information in the first operating system. Since the application icon of the default application in the first operating system is generated by the proxy application, the proxy application has Created application icon
  • the association relationship with the default application associated in the second operating system the association relationship may record the icon position of the default application in the first operating system.
  • the above-mentioned startup command may carry the coordinate information clicked by the user, and match the coordinate information with the icon position in the above-mentioned association recorded in the container running the second operating system, and match the clicked coordinate position with the icon position recorded in the container running the second operating system.
  • the application associated with the matching icon position is identified as the above-mentioned default application.
  • the second operating system responds to the application startup instruction, runs the preset application, and feeds back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application.
  • the container running the second operating system after the container running the second operating system generates a startup instruction for the default application, it can obtain the application data package corresponding to the default application, and use the application data package to start the above-mentioned steps in the container.
  • the preset application renders the operation interface of the preset application through the application framework layer in the container, and feeds the operation interface back to the proxy application to realize the display of the cross-system operation interface.
  • the container running the second operating system can convert the operation interface into a corresponding interface image, and send the interface image to the proxy application, that is, the preset generated within the first operating system.
  • the operation interface of the application is specifically displayed in image format.
  • the first operating system generates the operation interface in the first operating system through the proxy application.
  • the agent application running in the first operating system can render it in the first operating system of the smart tablet, so that the user can The operation interface for initiating touch operations.
  • FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of an operation interface provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the operation interface is specifically a full-screen operation interface.
  • the operation interface is generated based on a preset application running in a container running a second operating system, and is generated through a proxy application. Rendering is performed in the first operating system.
  • the operation interface can be an image data, that is, each of the above-mentioned operable controls does not have a corresponding interactive interface in the operation interface, but needs to be fed back to the operation interface through a proxy application. Only the preset application running in the container can respond to the above interactive operations.
  • the operation interface may also be a non-full-screen display operation interface, such as displaying the operation interface in a floating window.
  • the specific method used to display the operation interface will be determined according to the specific preset application and is not limited here.
  • cross-system data transmission is realized through the proxy application, and the operation interface of the preset application feedback running through the container is received through the proxy application, thereby realizing the display of the cross-system operation interface and providing convenience for subsequent users in the third application.
  • Initiating a touch operation for cross-system applications within an operating system provides a basis for implementation, and the display process of the above-mentioned operation interface is consistent with the display effect of the operation interface of general applications, so that the above-mentioned cross-system application startup is convenient for users. It is non-perceptual and greatly improves the consistency of user operations, thereby improving the user experience.
  • the smart tablet is equipped with a touch module, and the user can initiate touch operations in the touch module.
  • touch operations include touch operations of the click selection type, and other touch operations except the click selection type. , such as edge gesture type touch operations, multi-touch touch operations, and character input operations in the editable area through the soft keyboard.
  • FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of different touch operations provided by embodiments of the present application.
  • the smart tablet records a variety of smart gestures, which can facilitate the operation of the smart tablet and improve the user's operating efficiency of the smart tablet.
  • the user can initiate a sliding operation from the left edge of the smart tablet screen as the starting point, and the corresponding operation command of the sliding operation starting from the edge is "return”. Or "Close the current operation window", etc. You can respond to different operation instructions according to the actual situation. By initiating the same gesture as the preset recording rule, you can operate the application without clicking the corresponding control in the operation window, which improves Flexibility of user operations.
  • Multi-touch touch operation The touch module of the smart tablet supports multi-touch, as shown in (c) in Figure 10. The user can zoom in and out of the display objects in the application through two-finger touch.
  • a first touch module is configured in the first operating system, and the smart tablet receives a touch initiated by the user based on a preset application running across the system. During operation, the touch operation can be handed over to the first touch module for processing to generate a corresponding touch event.
  • the second operating system generates an operation instruction corresponding to the touch event through the second touch module.
  • the first touch module in the smart tablet can transmit the touch event to the second touch module configured in the image container running the second operating system.
  • the touch module is specifically used to identify touch events generated in the first operating system and convert them into operation instructions that can be recognized by the second operating system.
  • the smart tablet is configured with a proxy application.
  • the touch event can be transmitted to the proxy application located in the application layer.
  • the proxy application transmits the above touch event to the second touch module in the container.
  • the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
  • the operation instructions generated by the second touch module are instructions that can be recognized by the second operating system
  • the default application built based on the second operating system can also respond to the operation instructions and execute the operation instructions in the second operating system. Generate corresponding response results, such as returning to the previous level interface, closing the default application, adjusting the display content, etc.
  • the specific response results can be determined according to the initiated touch operation, and are not limited here.
  • the touch input method provided by the embodiment of the present application can run a preset application across operating systems in the first operating system, and the user initiates a touch control for the preset application in the first operating system.
  • the corresponding touch event can be generated through the first touch module of the first operating system and transmitted to the second operating system, and the touch event can be converted through the second touch module in the second operating system to generate a
  • the operation instructions recognized by the second operating system allow the preset application running in the second operating system to execute the operation instructions and generate corresponding response results, thereby realizing interoperability of touch operations across systems.
  • corresponding touch modules are configured in different operating systems, and the touch operations are converted across systems through the touch modules, so that it is possible to generate a system that supports cross-system operation.
  • the preset application-identified operation instructions improve the consistency of cross-system operations, thereby improving the expansion of the application ecosystem within the operating system and meeting the user needs.
  • FIG. 11 shows a data flow diagram for converting different types of touch operations into operation instructions provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the above-mentioned first touch module contains a plurality of different sub-units
  • the second touch module also contains different sub-units, and different sub-units are used to implement different types of touch. Operational transformation.
  • the above data flow diagram specifically includes three data flows, namely data flow 1 for the first touch operation of the edge gesture type, data flow 2 for the second touch operation of the multi-touch type, and data flow 2 for the preset application. Data stream 3 for the third touch operation of clicking on any area.
  • Type 1 First touch operation for edge gesture type.
  • FIG. 12 shows an implementation flow chart of a method for edge gesture type touch input according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • S702 is specifically S1201
  • S703 is specifically S1202
  • S704 is specifically S1203. The specific description is as follows:
  • the first touch module determines the window type of the target window, and generates a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type;
  • the target window is the first Touch operation operates in the preset application window;
  • the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation.
  • the edge gesture initiated in the smart tablet is specifically used to operate the entire operation window of the application running in the foreground, such as returning to the interface or exiting the application.
  • the above-mentioned operation types specifically refer to the operations corresponding to edge gestures.
  • the above-mentioned operation types include but are not limited to: closing windows, exiting applications, or performing application management and other different types of operations.
  • the specific operations can be set according to the actual situation of the user. , which is no longer limited here.
  • FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of multiple edge gestures provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the user can start sliding from the right edge of the smart tablet screen to generate a sliding instruction from right to left. Different from the left sliding instruction initiated within the screen, the above sliding instruction is Starting from the right edge of the screen, the smart tablet will recognize the sliding command as an edge gesture touch operation and query the operation command associated with the touch operation. In this example, the left sliding touch on the right edge The corresponding operation is the "exit" operation command.
  • the user can start sliding from the lower edge of the smart tablet screen to generate a sliding instruction from bottom to top. Different from the upward sliding instruction initiated within the screen, the above sliding instruction is based on the screen.
  • the lower edge is the starting point, so the smart tablet will recognize that the sliding command is for application window management, as shown in (c) in Figure 13.
  • the user can close the corresponding application through this application window management, or switch to other applications.
  • the operation instructions corresponding to the edge gestures can be set according to actual conditions, and the operation instructions corresponding to the edge gestures are not limited here.
  • the operation window operated by the operation instruction needs to be determined first. Since the operation instructions corresponding to the same edge gesture will be different for different window types, in order to improve the accuracy of touch operations, the smart tablet first needs to determine the target window for the required operation, and then determine the window type corresponding to the target window.
  • the above window types include: parent window types and child window types.
  • Each preset application corresponds to an operation window of the parent window type, and the parent window type can contain multiple page jump controls.
  • the user can click on any page jump control in the operation interface of the parent window type to enter The operation interface of the corresponding sub-window type; similarly, the operation interface of the sub-window type can also include a page jump control to enter the secondary operation window, and so on.
  • the window type of the secondary operation window also belongs to the sub-window type. Window type. Different window types respond differently to the same edge gesture.
  • Figure 14 shows a comparison chart of responses of different window types to the same edge gesture.
  • the window type of the target window that the user needs to operate is specifically a sub-window type.
  • a locally stored document is opened in a text editing application, and the document has not been modified.
  • the user initiates a left-swipe operation starting from the right edge, and the smart tablet recognizes the left-swipe operation as the first touch operation of the edge gesture type.
  • the above target window will be closed and the parent operation window corresponding to the default application will be returned (which can also be called the main operation interface).
  • the target window for the user's operation is still a sub-window in the text editing application (that is, the target window type is a sub-window type), but in this example, the user has already edited the document
  • the target window type is a sub-window type
  • the user has already edited the document
  • a save prompt box will be generated to confirm whether the user needs to save the edited content. , if you click the save control 141, you will return to the main operation interface; if you click the cancel control 143, you will return to the target window for document editing; if you click the do not save control 142, the edit will not be saved and you will return to the main operation interface.
  • the window type of the target window that the user needs to operate is specifically the parent window type.
  • the window will not exit immediately.
  • the application will prompt the user to exit again.
  • the user can initiate the above-mentioned left sliding operation starting from the right edge again, and the above-mentioned application will exit and return to the desktop interface of the smart tablet.
  • the smart tablet needs to preset the window type corresponding to the target window of the current operation of the application, and query the edge touch
  • the response method associated with the operation (such as the above-mentioned exit page, or application window management, etc.) and window type are encapsulated to generate the corresponding first touch event.
  • the above response mode can be determined based on the corresponding relationship between the locally recorded touch gestures and the response mode.
  • the implementation of determining the window type specifically includes the following steps:
  • the touch window management unit in the first touch module is called to determine the target.
  • the window type of the window; the touch window management unit is used to establish a cascade relationship between each operation window in the preset application.
  • the first touch module includes a touch management unit and a touch window management unit.
  • the touch management unit is specifically used to monitor touch operations initiated in the first operating system, and after detecting that the user initiates a touch operation, determine the type of the touch operation and forward it to the corresponding unit for processing. deal with.
  • the touch management unit when the touch management unit recognizes that the touch operation initiated by the user is a first touch operation of the edge gesture type, it will determine the response mode corresponding to the first touch operation, and assign the first touch operation to the first touch operation.
  • the touch operation is sent to the touch window management unit to determine the window type of the target window of the current operation. Since the touch window management unit maintains the cascading relationship of each operation window in the application during the process of running the preset application, that is, it is used to determine whether each window belongs to the parent window type or the child window type. Based on this, the touch window The management unit can determine the window type of the target window through the cascade relationship. After determining the response mode and window type, the management unit can generate a first touch event corresponding to the threshold and send it to the second touch unit.
  • the touch management unit identifies the touch operation type and forwards it to the corresponding unit for subsequent response, which can improve the accuracy of touch event generation.
  • a first operation instruction for the target window is generated through the window management unit in the second touch module.
  • the second touch window is configured with a window management unit for managing operation windows of each default application running in the second operating system. Therefore, after the second touch module receives the first touch event sent by the first touch module and detects that the first touch event is an edge gesture touch event, it will send the touch event to The window management unit is received, and the first operation instruction corresponding to the first touch event is generated through the window management unit, so that the preset application performs the corresponding operation.
  • the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
  • first determining the window type of the target window for the required operation can improve the accuracy of subsequent window operations. This makes the operation of cross-system preset applications consistent with the operation habits of native applications built based on the first operating system, reducing the learning cost required for user operations.
  • Type 2 Second touch operation for multi-touch type.
  • FIG. 15 shows an implementation flow chart of a multi-contact type touch input method according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • S702 is specifically S1501
  • S703 is specifically S1502
  • S704 is specifically S1503. The specific description is as follows:
  • the first touch module generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation, and transmits the multi-touch event to the second touch module.
  • the multi-touch event includes the first touch coordinates and touch time of each touch point in the first operating system.
  • Android system devices often support multi-touch touch operations, such as image transformation operations such as zooming in, zooming out, and rotating images through two fingers, or long pressing and dragging. Move display objects in the page, etc. Therefore, after the user initiates a multi-touch type touch operation on the smart tablet, the first touch module can generate a corresponding multi-touch event, and the multi-touch event can include the touch operation initiated this time.
  • the first touch coordinates corresponding to each corresponding touch point that is, the corresponding coordinates in the first operating system
  • the first touch module will send it to the second touch module for subsequent processing after generating a multi-touch event. deal with.
  • each touch point can be connected in sequence according to the first touch coordinates and touch time corresponding to different touch points, thereby forming a touch trajectory corresponding to the second touch operation.
  • FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a multi-contact type touch operation provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • an image is displayed in the operation interface of the default application. The user can move the two fingers outward to position the image. big.
  • a document is displayed in the operation interface of the default application. Since the document contains a lot of content, a progress bar is configured in the document. The user can drag the progress bar to view the corresponding paragraphs in the document, for example Swipe up to view the content of the next paragraph in the document.
  • multi-contact operations have different response methods according to different applications. The specific settings are based on the actual situation and are not limited.
  • the touch management unit recognizes that the touch operation is a second touch operation
  • the touch event conversion unit in the first touch module processes the second touch operation. Perform legal verification of control operations.
  • a multi-touch event is generated through the touch event conversion unit, and the multi-touch event is sent to The second touch module; the multi-touch event records the first touch coordinates of each contact point in the first operating system.
  • the first touch module includes a touch management unit and a touch event conversion unit.
  • the above-mentioned touch management unit is used to monitor the touch operation initiated in the first operating system, and after detecting that the touch operation is a second touch operation of multi-contact type, the second touch operation is Forwarded to the touch event conversion unit for subsequent processing.
  • the touch event conversion unit after receiving the above-mentioned second touch event, the touch event conversion unit will first verify its legality, that is, whether this multi-touch out operation is a valid operation. If the touch event conversion unit detects that the second touch type passes legal verification, it can convert it into a multi-touch event that can be recognized by the second operating system.
  • the multi-touch event may include first touch coordinates of each touch point in the first operating system.
  • the touch event conversion unit performs legal verification on the touch operation and performs event conversion, thereby generating multi-touch events that can be recognized by other operating systems, thereby improving multi-touch touch control. Operational accuracy reduces responses to invalid operations.
  • the above-mentioned touch event conversion unit is also used to cancel an abnormal touch operation. Since the user initiates a second touch operation with multiple touch points, it takes a certain amount of operation time. Therefore, it is possible that the user has not completed the drawing.
  • the touch event conversion unit has already sent the previously collected multi-touch event to the second touch event. After the entire sliding trajectory is drawn, the sliding trajectory is consistent with the preset shortcut gesture, that is, The operation correspondence is not for the default application. At this time, the default application needs to be stopped from responding to the second touch operation.
  • the touch event conversion module in the first touch module can generate a cancellation response. command, and sends the cancel response command to the second touch module. After the second touch module receives the cancel response command, it stops the default application from responding to the second touch operation.
  • FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of canceling response to a multi-touch operation provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the user initiates a multi-touch touch operation similar to sliding downwards.
  • the touch event conversion unit performs a complete verification on the above touch trajectory and completes the verification.
  • the corresponding multi-touch event is generated and sent to the second touch module.
  • the user continues to perform sliding operations in the first operating system, and obtains a sliding trajectory as shown in (b) in Figure 17, specifically a circular sliding trajectory, and the circular sliding trajectory corresponds to the improvement of The display brightness of the smart tablet (that is, not for the default application, but for the screen of the smart tablet).
  • the touch event conversion unit will generate a cancellation response command and send the cancellation response command to the second touch module to stop the default app from responding to the circular sliding trajectory.
  • the second touch module performs coordinate transformation on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
  • the operation interface can be adjusted according to the actual display interface when rendering. Therefore, the first touch is determined in the first operating system. There is a certain deviation between the control coordinates and the coordinates in the second operating system, and coordinate conversion needs to be performed through the second touch module, so that the generated second operation instructions can accurately execute the preset application running in the second operating system. Operate on the specified content, and obtain the second operation instruction based on the converted coordinates.
  • the above-mentioned specific process of generating the second operation instruction includes:
  • the multi-touch event is completely verified through the multi-touch management unit in the second touch module.
  • the touch window conversion unit in the second touch module Each of the touch points in the multi-touch event performs coordinate conversion to determine the second touch coordinates corresponding to each of the first touch coordinates of the preset application running in the container; the second touch The coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system, the size of the second window corresponding to the preset application in the second operating system, and the first touch The coordinates are determined; the first window is a mapping window for the second window under the first operating system.
  • the touch window conversion unit determines the target window for the required operation in the preset application, and generates a second operation instruction acting on the target window based on the second touch point coordinates.
  • the second touch module includes a multi-touch management unit.
  • the multi-touch management unit is specifically used to manage touch input events of each application running in the second operating system.
  • the above touch input events support multiple Contact processing, and integrity verification of the above touch input events. Therefore, after the second touch module receives the multi-touch event sent by the touch event conversion unit, it can first perform an integrity check through the multi-touch management unit. After detecting the multi-touch event, the corresponding The coordinate transformation is performed only after the sliding trajectory is complete.
  • the above-mentioned multi-touch management unit can also determine the application operated by the multi-touch event, because in the first operating system, multiple windows can be used simultaneously Multiple different applications are run. Therefore, on the second operating system side, a corresponding unit is also needed to determine the preset application corresponding to the multi-touch event.
  • the method of determining the preset application can be based on the area where each touch point falls, and which application window the area is, so that the application to which the window where the touch point falls can be identified as Default application.
  • the multi-touch event carries the application identifier of the preset application for the required operation
  • the multi-touch management unit can extract the application identifier from the multi-touch event to determine Default applications that run within the second operating system.
  • the multi-touch management unit after determining the integrity of the multi-touch event, the multi-touch management unit will send the multi-touch event to the touch window conversion unit.
  • the touch window conversion unit can obtain the multi-touch event from the multi-touch event. Extract the first touch coordinate contained in the touch event, and determine the size of the second window corresponding to the default application when running in the second operating system, and then determine the size of the first window corresponding to the default application in the first operating system.
  • the size of the window and the size of the above-mentioned second window can determine the offset of the coordinates between different operating systems, and adjust each first touch coordinate based on the offset. Finally, the position of each touch point in the second operating system can be calculated. The corresponding coordinates of the second contact point within.
  • the touch window conversion unit is also used to determine the target window for the required operation in the preset application, and transmit the second operation instruction based on the coordinates of the second contact point of the multiple contacts. Give the corresponding target window, so that the corresponding target window in the preset application executes the above second operation instruction.
  • coordinate conversion and window confirmation are implemented through the touch window conversion unit, and the application program for the required operation is determined through the multi-touch management unit, thereby improving the accuracy of the touch operation.
  • the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
  • the touch coordinates are converted through the second touch module, so that the touch operation can also accurately operate the preset applications running across the system, thereby realizing multi-touch type operations. It can realize cross-system transmission and identification, improving the usable scope of cross-system operations.
  • Type 3 The third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application.
  • FIG. 18 shows an implementation flow chart of a touch input method for clicking on any area in a preset application according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • S702 is specifically S1801
  • S703 is specifically S1802
  • S703 is specifically S1803.
  • S703, Including S1804 the specific description is as follows:
  • the first touch module generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to a third touch operation; the cursor displacement touch event includes a third touch coordinate corresponding to the touch operation.
  • the user can click to select the corresponding page control in the operation interface corresponding to the preset application, and can also click to input characters into the editable area. Therefore, in order to distinguish the above two different operation types, the first An operating system can generate the above-mentioned cursor displacement touch event through the first touch module.
  • the cursor displacement touch event includes the coordinates of the user's click in the operation interface corresponding to the default application, that is, the above-mentioned third touch event. coordinate.
  • the operation interface for the default application generated in the first operating system through the proxy application is specifically an image data, that is, there is no corresponding operable control in the first operating system.
  • the identification needs to be determined by the container running the second operating system, that is, the first touch module needs to determine the position of this click operation (ie, the third touch coordinate) and generate the corresponding cursor displacement touch event.
  • generating the above-mentioned cursor displacement touch event specifically includes the following steps:
  • the first touch module includes a touch management unit, wherein the touch management unit is used to monitor the touch operation initiated in the first operating system, and detect that the touch operation is the third After the touch operation, the third touch operation is forwarded to the touch event conversion unit for subsequent processing.
  • the above-mentioned first touch module further includes: a touch event conversion unit and an input touch detection unit, the touch event conversion unit is specifically used to convert into a touch event input that can be recognized by the second operating system;
  • the input touch detection unit is specifically used to identify the specific click type of the click operation initiated by the user.
  • the touch event conversion unit may perform legality verification on the third touch operation. If the third touch operation does not pass the legal verification, the first operating system may not respond to the third touch operation; conversely, if the third touch operation is a valid touch operation, the first operating system may respond to the input touch operation.
  • the control detection unit identifies the specific click type of the click operation initiated by the user on any area in the preset application.
  • the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinate are identified through the input touch detection unit, and based on the click type And the cursor displacement event generated by the third touch coordinate is sent to the second touch module.
  • different click types correspond to response modes.
  • the above click types include but are not limited to: click operations such as single click, double click, and long press.
  • click operations such as single click, double click, and long press.
  • single-click click operations it can be used to select a display object in a preset application, or when clicking on an editable area, it means that text input is required in this area;
  • double-click click operations it may be It is used to cache and select the text content corresponding to the area;
  • long-press type click operations it can be used to pop up the corresponding text editing menu to realize operations such as copying, pasting, and deleting the selected text. It can be seen that different click operations can correspond to different response modes (that is, different operation instructions can be generated).
  • the first operating system needs to determine its operation through the touch detection unit.
  • the corresponding click type is generated, and a cursor movement event is generated according to the click type and the corresponding click position (ie, the third touch coordinate), and the cursor movement event is sent to the second touch module.
  • the operation interface returned by the proxy application about the default application can be specifically an image data, that is, different areas are displayed in the form of pixels in the first operating system, and the area type of each area cannot be determined.
  • the first operating system needs to use the second operating system to determine the area type of the click area, for example, determine whether the area clicked by the user is an editable area or a non-editable area, so it needs to send the cursor movement event to the second operation
  • the system's container performs subsequent identification operations.
  • complete identification is performed through the touch management unit in the first touch module.
  • the touch detection unit is called to determine the status of the third touch operation. Click type and third touch coordinates, and then generate a corresponding cursor displacement event, and send the cursor displacement event to the second touch module for subsequent recognition processing, so that when providing interface feedback, the second operating system is running
  • the container only needs to send the image of the operation interface to the first operating system. On the basis of ensuring that the user can smoothly select the controls contained in the operation interface, it reduces the amount of data that needs to be transmitted during the cross-system application operation process, thereby improving Improves the response speed of cross-system application operations.
  • the second touch module identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type.
  • the second touch module can extract the third touch coordinates from the above-mentioned cursor displacement event and use it in the second operating system
  • the click area corresponding to the third touch coordinate is determined in the default application in the click area, and then the area type corresponding to the click area can be determined, such as whether the area contains clickable controls, input text boxes, image data, etc.
  • Corresponding area types are identified according to different display contents, and the identified area types are fed back to the first touch module.
  • the specific process of identifying the above-mentioned area type includes:
  • the cursor displacement event sent by the first touch module is received through the click input sub-unit in the second touch module, and the click input sub-unit in the preset application is The virtual cursor is updated to the third touch coordinate.
  • the cursor classification unit in the second touch module identifies the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determines the third touch based on the cursor style.
  • the second touch module includes an input subunit and a cursor classification unit.
  • the above-mentioned input subunit is used to control the cursor to move; and the above-mentioned cursor classification unit is used to determine the style corresponding to the cursor in the application program, and identify the area type corresponding to the selected area through the cursor style.
  • FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of a cursor style provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the second touch module can determine the second touch position where the cursor needs to move through the input subunit. Since there may be a coordinate offset between the first operating system and the second operating system, after determining After the user clicks on the third touch coordinate in the first operating system, the second touch module can determine the corresponding second touch coordinate in the second operating system based on the third touch coordinate and the preset coordinate offset. touch position, and generate a movement instruction to control the cursor to move to the second touch position through the input subunit.
  • the cursor is moved to the above-mentioned second touch position through the mouse update unit, and then after the cursor moves to the second touch position, the corresponding cursor style is changed according to the type corresponding to the area, and the cursor is determined through the cursor classification unit
  • the area type associated with the style can recognize the area type and feed the recognition result back to the first touch module.
  • the virtual cursor is effective for the second operating system, that is, the above-mentioned virtual cursor only exists inside the second operating system, and the movement and display of the cursor will not be fed back to the first operating system, that is, when the user When the default application is controlled in the first operating system, the virtual cursor is invisible, that is, the change in the cursor style only exists in the second operating system and is used to identify the area type of the user click area.
  • the logic is simple, thereby improving the efficiency of area type identification.
  • the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
  • the default application can move the virtual cursor in the application to a designated area according to a click operation initiated by the user. If the user clicks on a control associated with a jump link, it will jump to the specified page; if the user clicks on a virtual button, the menu associated with the virtual button can be opened, or a function corresponding to the virtual button can be executed. Operation, if the area clicked by the user is an editable area, the user can enter the text input state.
  • the soft keyboard is opened through the first touch module.
  • the second touch module can feed back the identified area type to the first touch module. If the above area type is an editable area type, it means that the user may need to input text in this area. In this case
  • the built-in soft keyboard can be turned on through the first touch module, so that the user can complete corresponding input operations through the soft keyboard.
  • the soft keyboard will continue to be turned on. .
  • FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of opening the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 shows the operation interface of the preset application.
  • the operation interface contains multiple clickable controls.
  • the user can click on the above controls to open the corresponding menu, such as inserting Control 201; also includes an editable text input area 202.
  • the first touch module can open the soft keyboard 203, As shown in (b) in Figure 20, the user can complete the text input operation through the soft keyboard.
  • the process of opening the soft keyboard may specifically include:
  • click gesture information is sent to the input state recognition unit in the first touch module through the input touch detection unit in the first touch module, so that the input state recognition unit enters monitoring
  • the second touch module feeds back the waiting state of the area type.
  • an input state recognition unit is also configured in the first touch module.
  • the touch detection unit sends the above-mentioned cursor displacement event to the second touch module, it will simultaneously send an input state recognition unit to the above-mentioned cursor displacement event.
  • Click gesture information at this time, the input state recognition unit will enter a waiting state to wait for the second touch unit to feedback the area type of the click area.
  • the input state identification unit receives the area type fed back by the second touch module, and when it is detected that the area type is an editable area type, the input state identification unit Open the soft keyboard.
  • the cursor classification unit in the second touch module determines the corresponding area type, it can feed back to the above-mentioned input state recognition unit. Since the above-mentioned input state recognition unit is always in a listening state, after receiving the above-mentioned After inputting the area type fed back by the status recognition unit, different operations can be performed according to the area type.
  • the input state recognition unit determines that the area clicked by the user is an editable area, and therefore opens the soft keyboard so that the user can perform text input operations.
  • the built-in soft keyboard can be closed through the first touch module.
  • FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of closing the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the area originally selected by the user is the editable area 211.
  • the first touch module can open the soft keyboard to facilitate the user's input, and when the user clicks the above insert
  • the first touch module will close the above-mentioned soft keyboard and open the control menu 213 corresponding to the inserted control, as shown in (b) of Figure 21 .
  • the soft keyboard continues to be closed. state.
  • the soft keyboard when the input state recognition unit determines that the area clicked by the user is a non-editing area, the soft keyboard is closed to prevent the soft keyboard from blocking other displayed content.
  • the soft keyboard it is determined whether to enable the soft keyboard by identifying whether the type of user click is an editable area, so as to avoid the inability to automatically operate cross-system applications due to different input methods between different operating systems.
  • the soft keyboard is turned on, which improves the accuracy of cross-system application operations.
  • FIG. 22 shows a structural block diagram of the touch input system provided by the embodiment of the present application. For convenience of explanation, only the parts related to the embodiment of the present application are shown. part.
  • the touch input system includes a first operating system and a second operating system; the first operating system 221 and the second operating system 222 are different;
  • the first operating system 221 includes:
  • the touch operation receiving module 2211 is used to receive the user's touch operation on the preset application in the first operating system; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
  • the first touch module 2212 is configured to respond to the touch operation and send the touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second touch module in the second operating system;
  • the second operating system 222 includes:
  • the second touch module 2221 is used to generate operation instructions corresponding to the touch event
  • the operation instruction execution module 2222 is used to execute the operation instruction through the preset application.
  • the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application.
  • the first operating system 221 and the second operating system 222 are any one of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system, and windows operating system.
  • the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type
  • the first touch module 2212 is specifically configured to: determine the window type of the target window, and generate a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first Touch operation is performed on the window operated in the preset application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation;
  • the second touch module 2221 also includes a window management unit
  • the window management unit is used to generate a first operation instruction for the target window.
  • the window type includes a parent window type and a child window type
  • the operation types include closing the window, exiting the application, and performing application management.
  • the first touch module 2212 also includes: a touch management unit and a touch window management unit;
  • the touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when the touch operation is recognized as a first touch operation, send the first touch operation to the Touch window management unit;
  • the touch window management unit is used to establish a cascade relationship between each operation window in the preset application
  • the touch window management unit is also configured to determine the window type of the target window according to the first touch operation.
  • the touch operation is a second touch operation of a multi-contact type
  • the first touch module 2212 is specifically configured to: generate a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation, and transmit the multi-touch event to the third operating system in the second operating system.
  • Two touch modules; the multi-touch event includes the first touch coordinates and touch time of each touch point in the first operating system;
  • the second touch module 2221 is specifically configured to perform coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
  • the first touch module 2212 includes: a touch management unit and a touch event conversion unit;
  • the touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is the second touch operation, send the second touch operation to the touch screen.
  • Control event conversion unit
  • the touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the second touch operation
  • the touch event conversion unit is also configured to generate the multi-touch event if it is recognized that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, and send the multi-touch event to all The second touch module in the second operating system.
  • the second touch module 2221 includes: a multi-touch management unit and a touch window conversion unit;
  • the multi-touch management unit is used to complete verification of the multi-touch event, and when it is recognized that the multi-touch event passes the complete verification, send the multi-touch event. to the touch window conversion unit;
  • the touch window conversion unit is used to perform coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event, and determine the second touch corresponding to each of the first touch coordinates in the second operating system. Coordinates; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system and the corresponding second window of the preset application in the second operating system. The size and the first touch coordinates are determined; the first window is a mapping window for the second window under the first operating system;
  • the touch window conversion unit is also used to generate the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
  • control window conversion unit is also used for:
  • the touch operation is a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application.
  • the first touch module 2212 is specifically configured to: generate a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and send the cursor displacement touch event to the third operating system in the second operating system.
  • the second touch module 2221 is specifically configured to: identify the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generate a third operation instruction according to the area type;
  • the second touch module 2221 is also used to: send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system;
  • the first touch module 2212 is also configured to enable the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is an editable area type.
  • the first touch module 2212 is also configured to not open the soft keyboard when it is detected that the area type is a non-editing area type.
  • the first touch module 2212 includes: a touch management unit, a touch event conversion unit, and an input touch detection unit;
  • the touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is a third touch operation, send the third touch operation to the Touch event conversion unit;
  • the touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the third touch operation, and when it is detected that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, the input touch detection unit Send a click recognition event generated based on the third touch operation;
  • the input touch detection unit is configured to, in response to the click recognition event, identify the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determine the click type and the third touch coordinate based on the click type and the third touch coordinate.
  • the cursor displacement event generated by the three touch coordinates is sent to the second touch module in the second operating system.
  • the first touch module 2212 further includes: an input state recognition unit;
  • the input touch detection unit is also configured to send click gesture information to the input state recognition unit in the first touch module, so that the input state recognition unit monitors the feedback from the second touch module. Waiting states for zone types;
  • the input state recognition unit is configured to receive the area type fed back by the second touch module, and when detecting that the area type is an editable area type, enable the soft keyboard.
  • the second touch module 2221 includes: a click input subunit and a cursor classification unit;
  • the click input subunit is configured to receive the cursor displacement event sent by the first touch module of the first operating system, and update the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third Touch coordinates;
  • the cursor classification unit is used to identify the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determine the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style;
  • the cursor classification unit is also used to send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system.
  • the first operating system includes: a startup operation receiving unit, an application startup unit, and an interface display unit;
  • the second operating system includes: an interface feedback unit;
  • a startup operation receiving unit configured to receive a user's startup operation for the preset application in the first operating system
  • An application startup unit configured to initiate an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
  • An interface feedback unit configured to respond to the application startup instruction, run the preset application in the second operating system, and feed back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application;
  • An interface display unit is configured to generate the operation interface in the first operating system through the proxy application.
  • the touch input device provided by the embodiment of the present application can also run a preset application across operating systems in the first operating system.
  • the device can The corresponding touch event is generated by the first touch module of the first operating system and transmitted to the second touch module deployed in the container running the second operating system, and the touch event is converted by the second touch module , generate an operation instruction that can be recognized by the second operating system, so that the preset application running in the second operating system responds to the operation instruction and generates a corresponding response result, realizing the control of touch operations across systems. Interoperability.
  • the corresponding touch module converts touch operations across systems through the touch module, thereby generating operation instructions that support preset application recognition for cross-system operation, improving the consistency of cross-system operations, and thus improving the operational efficiency.
  • the expansion of the application ecosystem within the system meets the needs of users.
  • Figure 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the electronic device 23 of this embodiment includes: at least one processor 230 (only one processor is shown in Fig. 23), a memory 231, and a device stored in the memory 231 and capable of processing in the at least one processor 230.
  • the computer program 232 runs on the processor 230. When the processor 230 executes the computer program 232, the steps in any of the above touch input method embodiments are implemented.
  • the electronic device 23 may be a computing device such as a desktop computer, a notebook, a PDA, a cloud server, etc.
  • the electronic device may include, but is not limited to, a processor 230 and a memory 231.
  • FIG. 23 is only an example of the electronic device 23 and does not constitute a limitation on the electronic device 23. It may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components may be combined, or different components may be used. , for example, it may also include input and output devices, network access devices, etc.
  • the so-called processor 230 can be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU).
  • the processor 230 can also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (Application Specific Integrated Circuit). , ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • a general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
  • the memory 231 may be an internal storage unit of the electronic device 23 in some embodiments, such as a hard disk or memory of the electronic device 23 . In other embodiments, the memory 231 may also be an external storage device of the electronic device 23, such as a plug-in hard disk, a smart memory card (Smart Media Card, SMC), or a secure digital card equipped on the electronic device 23. (Secure Digital, SD) card, flash card (Flash Card), etc. Further, the memory 231 may also include both an internal storage unit of the electronic device 23 and an external storage device. The memory 231 is used to store operating systems, application programs, boot loaders (Boot Loaders), data, and other programs, such as program codes of the computer programs. The memory 231 can also be used to temporarily store data that has been output or is to be output.
  • an external storage device of the electronic device 23 such as a plug-in hard disk, a smart memory card (Smart Media Card, SMC), or a secure digital card equipped on the electronic device 23. (Secure Digital
  • Module completion means dividing the internal structure of the device into different functional units or modules to complete all or part of the functions described above.
  • Each functional unit and module in the embodiment can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit.
  • the above-mentioned integrated unit can be hardware-based. It can also be implemented in the form of software functional units.
  • the specific names of each functional unit and module are only for the convenience of distinguishing each other and are not used to limit the scope of protection of the present application.
  • For the specific working processes of the units and modules in the above system please refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
  • An embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device.
  • the electronic device includes: at least one processor, a memory, and a computer program stored in the memory and executable on the at least one processor.
  • the processor executes The computer program implements the steps in any of the above method embodiments.
  • Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program.
  • the steps in each of the above method embodiments can be implemented.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product.
  • the steps in each of the above method embodiments can be implemented when the mobile terminal is executed.
  • the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • this application can implement all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments by instructing relevant hardware through a computer program.
  • the computer program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the computer program When executed by a processor, the steps of each of the above method embodiments may be implemented.
  • the computer program includes computer program code, which may be in the form of source code, object code, executable file or some intermediate form.
  • the computer-readable medium may at least include: any entity or device capable of carrying computer program code to a camera/electronic device, a recording medium, a computer memory, a read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), electrical carrier signals, telecommunications signals, and software distribution media.
  • ROM Read-Only Memory
  • RAM Random Access Memory
  • electrical carrier signals telecommunications signals
  • software distribution media For example, U disk, mobile hard disk, magnetic disk or CD, etc.
  • computer-readable media may not be electrical carrier signals and telecommunications signals.
  • the disclosed devices/network devices and methods can be implemented in other ways.
  • the apparatus/network equipment embodiments described above are only illustrative.
  • the division of modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods, such as multiple units. Or components can be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be omitted, or not implemented.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
  • the units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Software Systems (AREA)
  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
  • User Interface Of Digital Computer (AREA)

Abstract

A touch input method, a system, an electronic device, and a storage medium. The method comprises: a first operating system receives a touch operation of a user on a preset application; in response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends to a second operating system a touch event generated on the basis of the touch operation; the second operating system generates an operation instruction corresponding to the touch event; and, by means of the preset application, the second operating system executes the operation instruction. The method may generate the operation instruction identified by the preset application supporting cross-system operation, and thus improves the consistency of cross-system operations, thereby improving the extension of the application ecology in the operating systems, and meeting the use requirements of users.

Description

一种触控输入的方法、系统、电子设备及存储介质A touch input method, system, electronic device and storage medium
本申请要求于2022年08月19日提交国家知识产权局、申请号为202211009728.1、申请名称为“一种触控输入的方法、系统、电子设备及存储介质”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application requires the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the State Intellectual Property Office on August 19, 2022, with the application number 202211009728.1 and the application title "A touch input method, system, electronic device and storage medium", which The entire contents are incorporated herein by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请属于设备控制技术领域,尤其涉及一种触控输入的方法、系统、电子设备及存储介质。The present application belongs to the field of device control technology, and in particular relates to a touch input method, system, electronic device and storage medium.
背景技术Background technique
随着设备技术的不断发展,移动终端的功能越来越强大,除了能够运行适用于移动端的应用程序,还能够通过运行其他操作系统的模拟器,通过模拟器运行适用于其他操作系统的应用程序,以实现跨系统的应用操作。With the continuous development of device technology, mobile terminals are becoming more and more powerful. In addition to being able to run applications suitable for mobile terminals, they can also run emulators of other operating systems. Applications suitable for other operating systems can be run through emulators. , to achieve cross-system application operations.
然而现有的设备控制技术,虽然能够在某一操作系统内通过模拟器的方式运行基于其他操作系统搭建的应用程序,例如在智能手机配置有运行Linux的容器,通过该容器以运行基于Linux系统搭建的应用程序,但由于不同的操作系统内配置的模块不一致,从而导致了用户对不同操作系统的操作方式存在差异,原本用户在智能设备上能够执行的触控操作无法被通过容器方式运行的另一操作系统识别,即通过跨系统运行部分应用程序时,存在操作方式不通用的情况,从而降低了用户的使用体验。However, existing device control technology can run applications based on other operating systems through an emulator within a certain operating system. For example, a smartphone is equipped with a container running Linux, and the container can run a system based on Linux. However, due to the inconsistent configuration of modules in different operating systems, there are differences in how users operate different operating systems. The touch operations that users can originally perform on smart devices cannot be run through containers. Another operating system identified that when running some applications across systems, the operation methods are not universal, thus reducing the user experience.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供了一种触控输入的方法、系统、电子设备以及计算机可读存储介质,可以解决现有的设备控制技术,通过跨系统运行部分应用程序时,存在操作方式不通用的情况,从而降低了用户的使用体验的问题。Embodiments of the present application provide a touch input method, system, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium, which can solve the problem of non-universal operating methods in existing device control technologies when running some applications across systems. , thereby reducing the problem of user experience.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供了一种触控输入的方法,所述方法应用于电子设备,所述电子设备同时搭载有第一操作系统以及第二操作系统,所述第一操作系统与所述第二操作系统不同;所述方法包括:In a first aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a touch input method. The method is applied to an electronic device. The electronic device is equipped with a first operating system and a second operating system. The first operating system and the second operating system are both equipped with a first operating system and a second operating system. The second operating system is different; the method includes:
所述第一操作系统接收用户对预设应用的触控操作;所述预设应用是基于所述第二操作系统搭建的;The first operating system receives a user's touch operation on a preset application; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统;The first operating system responds to the touch operation and sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system;
所述第二操作系统生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令;The second operating system generates an operation instruction corresponding to the touch event;
所述第二操作系统通过所述预设应用执行所述操作指令。The second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
以上可以看出,本申请实施例提供的一种触控输入的方法可以通过在第一操作系统中运行跨操作系统的预设应用,在用户在第一操作系统发起对于预设应用的触控操作时,可以通过第一操作系统的第一触控模块生成对应的触控事件,并传输第二操作系统,通过第二操作系统中的第二触控模块对触控事件进行转换,生成能够被第二操作系统识别的操作指令,从而运行于第二操作系统内的预设应用执行操作指令生成与之对应的响应结果,实现了对跨系统间的触控操作的互通。与现有的设备控制技术相比,本申请实施例中通过在不同的操作系统内配置对应的触控模块,通过触控模块对触控操作进行跨系统的转换,从而能够生成支持跨系统运行的预设应用识别的操作指令,提高了跨系统操作的一致性,从而提高了对于操作系统内的应用生态的扩展,满足了用户的使用需求。It can be seen from the above that the touch input method provided by the embodiment of the present application can run a preset application across operating systems in the first operating system, and the user initiates a touch control for the preset application in the first operating system. During operation, the corresponding touch event can be generated through the first touch module of the first operating system and transmitted to the second operating system, and the touch event can be converted through the second touch module in the second operating system to generate a The operation instructions recognized by the second operating system allow the preset application running in the second operating system to execute the operation instructions and generate corresponding response results, thereby realizing interoperability of touch operations across systems. Compared with the existing device control technology, in the embodiments of the present application, corresponding touch modules are configured in different operating systems, and the touch operations are converted across systems through the touch modules, so that it is possible to generate a system that supports cross-system operation. The preset application-identified operation instructions improve the consistency of cross-system operations, thereby improving the expansion of the application ecosystem within the operating system and meeting the user needs.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一操作系统以及所述第二操作系统为以下任一一种操作系统:安卓操作系统、鸿蒙操作系统、Linux操作系统或windows操作系统。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the first operating system and the second operating system are any of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system. .
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的触控操作、多触点类型的触控操作或对于所述预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third click on any area in the preset application. Three-touch operation.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的第一触控操作; In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type;
所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统,包括:In response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
第一操作系统确定目标窗口的窗口类型,并根据所述窗口类型生成所述第一触控操作对应的第一触控事件;所述目标窗口为所述第一触控操作在所述预设应用中操作的窗口;所述第一触控事件包括:所述目标窗口的窗口类型以及所述第一触控操作对应的操作类型。The first operating system determines the window type of the target window, and generates a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first touch operation in the preset time. The window operated in the application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述窗口类型为父窗口类型或子窗口类型,操作类型为关闭窗口、退出应用或进行应用管理。In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the window type is a parent window type or a child window type, and the operation type is closing the window, exiting the application, or performing application management.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述触控操作为多触点类型的第二触控操作;In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the touch operation is a second touch operation of a multi-contact type;
所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统,包括:In response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
所述第一操作系统生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二操作系统;所述多点触控事件包括在所述第一操作系统内各个所述触点的第一触控坐标以及触控时间;The first operating system generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation and transmits the multi-touch event to the second operating system; the multi-touch event is included in the The first touch coordinates and touch time of each contact point in the first operating system;
所述通过所述第一触控模块将所述触控事件发送给运行有所述第二操作系统的容器内的第二触控模块,并通过所述第二触控模块生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令,包括:The first touch module sends the touch event to the second touch module in the container running the second operating system, and the second touch module generates the touch event. The operation instructions corresponding to the event include:
所述第二操作系统对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令。The second operating system performs coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一操作系统生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二触控模块,包括:In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the first operating system generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation and transmits the multi-touch event to the second Touch module, including:
所述第一操作系统监听所述用户发起的触控操作;The first operating system monitors touch operations initiated by the user;
所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述触控操作为第二触控操作,则对所述第二触控操作进行合法校验;If the first operating system recognizes that the touch operation is a second touch operation, it performs legal verification on the second touch operation;
所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述第二触控操作通过所述合法校验,则生成所述多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统。If the first operating system recognizes that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, it generates the multi-touch event and sends the multi-touch event to the second operating system. .
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二操作系统对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令,包括:In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the second operating system performs coordinate transformation on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system. ,include:
所述第二操作系统对所述多点触控事件进行完整校验;The second operating system performs complete verification on the multi-touch event;
所述第二操作系统若识别到所述多点触控事件通过完整校验,则对所述多点触控事件内的各个所述触点进行坐标转换,确定各个所述第一触控坐标在第二操作系统中对应的第二触控坐标;所述第二触控坐标是根据在所述第一操作系统中所述预设应用的第一窗口的尺寸、所述预设应用在所述第二操作系统中对应的第二窗口的尺寸以及所述第一触控坐标确定的;所述第一窗口是为所述第二窗口在所述第一操作系统下的映射窗口;If the second operating system recognizes that the multi-touch event passes complete verification, it performs coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event to determine each of the first touch coordinates. The corresponding second touch coordinates in the second operating system; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system and the location of the preset application in the first operating system. The size of the corresponding second window in the second operating system and the first touch coordinates are determined; the first window is the mapping window of the second window under the first operating system;
所述第二操作系统根据所述第二触控坐标生成所述第二操作指令。The second operating system generates the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二操作系统根据所述第二触控坐标生成所述第二操作指令,包括:In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the second operating system generates the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates, including:
所述第二操作系统确定所述预设应用中所需操作的目标窗口,并基于所述第二触点坐标生成作用于所述目标窗口的第二操作指令。The second operating system determines a target window for a required operation in the preset application, and generates a second operation instruction that acts on the target window based on the second contact point coordinates.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述触控操作包括对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作;In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the touch operation includes a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application;
所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统,包括:In response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
所述第一操作系统生成所述第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件,并将所述光标位移触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统;所述光标位移触控事件包含有所述触控操作对应的第三触控坐标;The first operating system generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and sends the cursor displacement touch event to the second operating system; the cursor displacement touch event includes The third touch coordinate corresponding to the above-mentioned touch operation;
所述第二操作系统生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令,包括:The second operating system generates operation instructions corresponding to the touch event, including:
所述第二操作系统识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令; The second operating system identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type;
在所述第二操作系统生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令之后,还包括:After the second operating system generates the operation instruction corresponding to the touch event, it also includes:
所述第一操作系统接收所述第二操作系统反馈的关于所述第三触控坐标对应的所述区域类型;The first operating system receives feedback from the second operating system regarding the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate;
所述第一操作系统在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启软键盘。When the first operating system detects that the area type is an editable area type, the soft keyboard is enabled.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在所述第一操作系统接收所述第二操作系统反馈的关于所述第三触控坐标对应的所述区域类型之后,还包括:In a possible implementation of the first aspect, after the first operating system receives feedback from the second operating system regarding the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate, the method further includes:
所述第一操作系统在检测到所述区域类型为非编辑区域类型时,不开启所述软键盘。The first operating system does not open the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is a non-editing area type.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述第一操作系统生成所述第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件,并将所述光标位移触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统,包括:In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the first operating system generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and sends the cursor displacement touch event to the second Operating system, including:
所述第一操作系统监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作;The first operating system monitors the touch operation initiated by the user;
所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述触控操作为第三触控操作,则对所述第三触控操作进行合法校验;If the first operating system recognizes that the touch operation is a third touch operation, it performs legal verification on the third touch operation;
所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述第三触控操作通过所述合法校验,则生成点击识别事件;If the first operating system recognizes that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, it generates a click recognition event;
所述第一操作系统响应于所述点击识别事件,识别所述第三触控操作对应的点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标,并将基于所述点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标生成的光标位移事件发送给所述第二操作系统。In response to the click recognition event, the first operating system identifies the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determines the click type and the third touch coordinates based on the click type and the third touch coordinates. The generated cursor displacement event is sent to the second operating system.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,所述第二操作系统识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令,包括:In a possible implementation of the first aspect, the second operating system identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type. ,include:
所述第二操作系统接收所述第一操作系统发送的光标位移事件,并将所述第二操作系统内的虚拟光标更新至所述第三触控坐标;The second operating system receives the cursor displacement event sent by the first operating system, and updates the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third touch coordinates;
所述第二操作系统识别更新至所述第三触控坐标时所述虚拟光标的光标样式,并基于所述光标样式确定所述第三触控坐标对应的区域类型。The second operating system identifies the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determines the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style.
在第一方面的一种可能的实现方式中,在所述第一操作系统接收用户对预设应用的触控操作,还包括:In a possible implementation of the first aspect, receiving a user's touch operation on a preset application in the first operating system further includes:
所述第一操作系统接收用户对于所述预设应用的启动操作;The first operating system receives a user's startup operation for the preset application;
所述第一操作系统通过安装于所述第一操作系统中的代理应用向所述第二操作系统发起应用启动指令;所述应用启动指令携带有所述预设应用的应用标识;The first operating system initiates an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
所述第二操作系统响应于所述应用启动指令,运行所述预设应用,并将所述预设应用的操作界面反馈给所述第一操作系统内的所述代理应用;The second operating system responds to the application startup instruction, runs the preset application, and feeds back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application in the first operating system;
所述第一操作系统通过所述代理应用生成所述操作界面。The first operating system generates the operation interface through the proxy application.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供了一种触控输入的系统,所述触控输入的系统包含第一操作系统以及第二操作系统;所述第一操作系统与所述第二操作系统不同;In a second aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a touch input system. The touch input system includes a first operating system and a second operating system; the first operating system is different from the second operating system. ;
所述第一操作系统包括:The first operating system includes:
触控操作接收模块,用于接收用户对所述第一操作系统中的预设应用的触控操作;所述预设应用是基于所述第二操作系统搭建的;A touch operation receiving module, configured to receive a user's touch operation on a preset application in the first operating system; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
第一触控模块,用于响应于触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统内的第二触控模块;A first touch module, configured to respond to a touch operation and send a touch event generated based on the touch operation to a second touch module in the second operating system;
所述第二操作系统包括:The second operating system includes:
所述第二触控模块,用于生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令;The second touch module is used to generate operation instructions corresponding to the touch event;
操作指令执行单元,用于通过所述预设应用执行所述操作指令。An operation instruction execution unit is used to execute the operation instruction through the preset application.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的触控操作、多触点类型的触控操作或对于所述预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third-party click on any area in the preset application. Touch operation.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第一操作系统以及所述第二操作系统为以下任一一种操作系统:安卓操作系统、鸿蒙操作系统、Linux操作系统或windows操作系统。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the first operating system and the second operating system are any one of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的第一触控操作;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type;
所述第一触控模块具体用于:确定目标窗口的窗口类型,并根据所述窗口类型生成所述第一触控操作对应的第一触控事件;所述目标窗口为所述第一触控操作在所述预设应用中操作的窗口;所述第一触控事件包括:所述目标窗口的窗口类型以及所述第一触控操作对应的操作类型; The first touch module is specifically configured to: determine a window type of a target window, and generate a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first touch event. Control the window operated in the preset application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation;
所述第二触控模块还包括窗口管理单元;The second touch module also includes a window management unit;
所述窗口管理单元,用于生成对于所述目标窗口的第一操作指令。The window management unit is used to generate a first operation instruction for the target window.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述窗口类型为父窗口类型或子窗口类型,操作类型为关闭窗口、退出应用或进行应用管理。In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the window type is a parent window type or a child window type, and the operation type is closing the window, exiting the application, or performing application management.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第一触控模块还包括:触控管理单元以及触控窗口管理单元;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the first touch module further includes: a touch management unit and a touch window management unit;
所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作,并在识别得到所述触控操作为第一触控操作时,将所述第一触控操作发送给所述触控窗口管理单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when the touch operation is recognized as a first touch operation, send the first touch operation to the Touch window management unit;
所述触控窗口管理单元,用于建立所述预设应用中各个操作窗口的级联关系;The touch window management unit is used to establish a cascade relationship between each operation window in the preset application;
所述触控窗口管理单元,还用于根据所述第一触控操作确定所述目标窗口的窗口类型。The touch window management unit is also configured to determine the window type of the target window according to the first touch operation.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述触控操作为多触点类型的第二触控操作;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the touch operation is a multi-touch type second touch operation;
所述第一触控模块具体用于:生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块;所述多点触控事件包括在所述第一操作系统内各个所述触点的第一触控坐标以及触控时间;The first touch module is specifically configured to: generate a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation, and transmit the multi-touch event to the second operating system in the second operating system. Touch module; the multi-touch event includes the first touch coordinates and touch time of each touch point in the first operating system;
所述第二触控模块具体用于:对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令。The second touch module is specifically configured to perform coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第一触控模块包括:触控管理单元、触控事件转换单元;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the first touch module includes: a touch management unit and a touch event conversion unit;
所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的触控操作,并在检测到所述触控操作为所述第二触控操作时将所述第二触控操作发送给所述触控事件转换单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is the second touch operation, send the second touch operation to the touch screen. Control event conversion unit;
所述触控事件转换单元,用于对所述第二触控操作进行合法校验;The touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the second touch operation;
所述触控事件转换单元,还用于若识别得到所述第二触控操作通过所述合法校验,则生成所述多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块。The touch event conversion unit is also configured to generate the multi-touch event if it is recognized that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, and send the multi-touch event to all The second touch module in the second operating system.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第二触控模块包括:多点触控管理单元以及触控窗口转换单元;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the second touch module includes: a multi-touch management unit and a touch window conversion unit;
所述多点触控管理单元,用于对所述多点触控事件进行完整校验,并在识别到所述多点触控事件通过完整校验时,将所述多点触控事件发送给所述触控窗口转换单元;The multi-touch management unit is used to complete verification of the multi-touch event, and when it is recognized that the multi-touch event passes the complete verification, send the multi-touch event. to the touch window conversion unit;
所述触控窗口转换单元,用于对所述多点触控事件内的各个所述触点进行坐标转换,确定各个所述第一触控坐标在第二操作系统中对应的第二触控坐标;所述第二触控坐标是根据在所述第一操作系统中所述预设应用的第一窗口的尺寸、所述预设应用在所述第二操作系统中对应的第二窗口的尺寸以及所述第一触控坐标确定的;所述第一窗口是为所述第二窗口在所述第一操作系统下的映射窗口;The touch window conversion unit is used to perform coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event, and determine the second touch corresponding to each of the first touch coordinates in the second operating system. Coordinates; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system and the corresponding second window of the preset application in the second operating system. The size and the first touch coordinates are determined; the first window is a mapping window for the second window under the first operating system;
所述触控窗口转换单元,还用于根据所述第二触控坐标生成所述第二操作指令。The touch window conversion unit is also used to generate the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述控窗口转换单元还用于:In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the control window conversion unit is also used to:
确定所述预设应用中所需操作的目标窗口,并基于所述第二触点坐标生成作用于所述目标窗口的第二操作指令。Determine a target window for a required operation in the preset application, and generate a second operation instruction that acts on the target window based on the second contact point coordinates.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述触控操作为对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the touch operation is a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application;
所述第一触控模块具体用于:生成所述第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件,并将所述光标位移触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块;所述光标位移触控事件包含有所述触控操作对应的第三触控坐标;The first touch module is specifically configured to: generate a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and send the cursor displacement touch event to the second operating system in the second operating system. Touch module; the cursor displacement touch event includes the third touch coordinate corresponding to the touch operation;
所述第二触控模块具体用于:识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令;The second touch module is specifically configured to: identify the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generate a third operation instruction according to the area type;
所述第二触控模块还用于:将所述区域类型发送给所述第一操作系统中的所述第一触控模块;The second touch module is also configured to: send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system;
所述第一触控模块还用于:在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启软键盘。The first touch module is also configured to enable the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is an editable area type.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第一触控模块还用于:在检测到所述区域类型为非编辑区域类型时,不开启所述软键盘。 In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the first touch module is further configured to not open the soft keyboard when it is detected that the area type is a non-editing area type.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第一触控模块包括:触控管理单元、触控事件转换单元以及输入触控检测单元;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the first touch module includes: a touch management unit, a touch event conversion unit, and an input touch detection unit;
所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作,并在检测到所述触控操作为第三触控操作时,将所述第三触控操作发送给所述触控事件转换单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is a third touch operation, send the third touch operation to the Touch event conversion unit;
所述触控事件转换单元,用于对所述第三触控操作进行合法校验,并在检测到所述第三触控操作通过所述合法校验时,向所述输入触控检测单元发送基于所述第三触控操作生成的点击识别事件;The touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the third touch operation, and when it is detected that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, the input touch detection unit Send a click recognition event generated based on the third touch operation;
所述输入触控检测单元,用于响应于所述点击识别事件,识别所述第三触控操作对应的点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标,并将基于所述点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标生成的光标位移事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块。The input touch detection unit is configured to, in response to the click recognition event, identify the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determine the click type and the third touch coordinate based on the click type and the third touch coordinate. The cursor displacement event generated by the three touch coordinates is sent to the second touch module in the second operating system.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第一触控模块还包括:输入状态识别单元;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the first touch module further includes: an input state recognition unit;
所述输入触控检测单元还用于:向所述第一触控模块内的输入状态识别单元发送点击手势信息,以使所述输入状态识别单元进入监听所述第二触控模块反馈所述区域类型的等待状态;The input touch detection unit is also configured to send click gesture information to the input state recognition unit in the first touch module, so that the input state recognition unit monitors the feedback from the second touch module. Waiting states for zone types;
所述输入状态识别单元,用于接收所述第二触控模块反馈的所述区域类型,并在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启所述软键盘。The input state recognition unit is configured to receive the area type fed back by the second touch module, and when detecting that the area type is an editable area type, enable the soft keyboard.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第二触控模块包括:点击输入子单元以及光标分类单元;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the second touch module includes: a click input subunit and a cursor classification unit;
所述点击输入子单元,用于接收所述第一操作系统的所述第一触控模块发送的所述光标位移事件,并将所述第二操作系统内的虚拟光标更新至所述第三触控坐标;The click input subunit is configured to receive the cursor displacement event sent by the first touch module of the first operating system, and update the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third Touch coordinates;
所述光标分类单元,用于识别更新至所述第三触控坐标时所述虚拟光标的光标样式,并基于所述光标样式确定所述第三触控坐标对应的区域类型;The cursor classification unit is used to identify the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determine the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style;
所述光标分类单元,还用于将所述区域类型发送给所述第一操作系统内的所述第一触控模块。The cursor classification unit is also used to send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system.
在第二方面的一种可能实现方式中,所述第一操作系统包括:启动操作接收单元、应用启动单元以及界面显示单元;所述第二操作系统包括:界面反馈单元;In a possible implementation of the second aspect, the first operating system includes: a startup operation receiving unit, an application startup unit, and an interface display unit; the second operating system includes: an interface feedback unit;
启动操作接收单元,用于接收用户在所述第一操作系统中发起对于所述预设应用的启动操作;A startup operation receiving unit configured to receive a user's startup operation for the preset application in the first operating system;
应用启动单元,用于通过安装于所述第一操作系统中的代理应用向所述第二操作系统发起应用启动指令;所述应用启动指令携带有所述预设应用的应用标识;An application startup unit configured to initiate an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
界面反馈单元,用于响应所述应用启动指令,在所述第二操作系统内运行所述预设应用,并将所述预设应用的操作界面反馈给所述代理应用;An interface feedback unit, configured to respond to the application startup instruction, run the preset application in the second operating system, and feed back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application;
界面显示单元,用于通过所述代理应用在所述第一操作系统内生成所述操作界面。An interface display unit is configured to generate the operation interface in the first operating system through the proxy application.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供了一种电子设备,包括:存储器、处理器以及存储在所述存储器中并可在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序,其特征在于,所述处理器执行所述计算机程序时实现上述第一方面中任一项所述触控输入的方法。In a third aspect, embodiments of the present application provide an electronic device, including: a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored in the memory and executable on the processor, wherein the processor executes The computer program implements the touch input method described in any one of the above first aspects.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,其特征在于,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现上述第一方面中任一项所述触控输入的方法。In a fourth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer-readable storage medium that stores a computer program, which is characterized in that when the computer program is executed by a processor, any of the above-mentioned aspects of the first aspect is implemented. A method of touch input.
第五方面,本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在电子设备上运行时,使得电子设备执行上述第一方面中任一项所述触控输入的方法。In a fifth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, which when the computer program product is run on an electronic device, causes the electronic device to perform the touch input method described in any one of the above first aspects.
第六方面,本申请实施例提供一种芯片系统,包括处理器,处理器与存储器耦合,所述处理器执行存储器中存储的计算机程序,以实现如第一方面中任一项所述触控输入的方法。In a sixth aspect, embodiments of the present application provide a chip system, including a processor. The processor is coupled to a memory. The processor executes a computer program stored in the memory to implement touch control as described in any one of the first aspects. Input method.
可以理解的是,上述第二方面至第六方面的有益效果可以参见上述第一方面中的相关描述,在此不再赘述。It can be understood that the beneficial effects of the above-mentioned second to sixth aspects can be referred to the relevant descriptions in the above-mentioned first aspect, and will not be described again here.
附图说明Description of drawings
图1是本申请实施例提供的电子设备的结构示意图;Figure 1 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图2是本申请实施例的电子设备的软件结构框图;Figure 2 is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device according to the embodiment of the present application;
图3是现有的安卓系统与Linux系统间可传输的触控操作的示意图;Figure 3 is a schematic diagram of touch operations that can be transmitted between the existing Android system and Linux system;
图4是本申请一实施例提供的智能平板的结构示意图; Figure 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图5是本申请一实施例提供的智能平板的桌面应用的示意图;Figure 5 is a schematic diagram of a desktop application of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图6是本申请一实施例提供的跨系统的数据传输的示意图;Figure 6 is a schematic diagram of cross-system data transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图7是本申请一实施例提供的触控输入的方法的实现流程图;Figure 7 is an implementation flow chart of a touch input method provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图8是本申请一实施例提供的运行预设应用的具体实现流程图;Figure 8 is a specific implementation flow chart for running a preset application provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图9是本申请一实施例提供的操作界面的示意图;Figure 9 is a schematic diagram of an operation interface provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图10是本申请实施例提供的不同触控操作的示意图;Figure 10 is a schematic diagram of different touch operations provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图11是本申请一实施例提供的对于不同类型的触控操作转换为操作指令的数据流图;Figure 11 is a data flow diagram for converting different types of touch operations into operation instructions provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图12是本申请一实施例对于边缘手势类型的触控输入的方法的实现流程图;Figure 12 is an implementation flow chart of a method for edge gesture type touch input according to an embodiment of the present application;
图13是本申请一实施例提供的多种边缘手势的示意图;Figure 13 is a schematic diagram of multiple edge gestures provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图14是本申请提供的不同窗口类型对于同一边缘手势的响应对比图;Figure 14 is a comparison chart of the responses of different window types to the same edge gesture provided by this application;
图15是本申请一实施例对于多触点类型的触控输入的方法的实现流程图;Figure 15 is an implementation flow chart of a method for multi-contact type touch input according to an embodiment of the present application;
图16是本申请一实施例提供的多触点类型的触控操作的示意图;Figure 16 is a schematic diagram of a multi-contact type touch operation provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图17是本申请一实施例提供的取消响应多触点操作的示意图;Figure 17 is a schematic diagram of canceling response to a multi-contact operation provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图18是本申请一实施例对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的触控输入的方法的实现流程图;Figure 18 is an implementation flow chart of a touch input method for clicking on any area in a preset application according to an embodiment of the present application;
图19是本申请一实施例提供的光标样式的示意图;Figure 19 is a schematic diagram of a cursor style provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图20是本申请一实施例提供的软键盘开启的示意图;Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of opening the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图21是本申请一实施例提供的软键盘关闭的示意图;Figure 21 is a schematic diagram of closing the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图22是本申请实施例提供的触控输入的装置的结构框图;Figure 22 is a structural block diagram of a touch input device provided by an embodiment of the present application;
图23是本申请一实施例提供的电子设备的结构框图。Figure 23 is a structural block diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
以下描述中,为了说明而不是为了限定,提出了诸如特定系统结构、技术之类的具体细节,以便透彻理解本申请实施例。然而,本领域的技术人员应当清楚,在没有这些具体细节的其它实施例中也可以实现本申请。在其它情况中,省略对众所周知的系统、装置、电路以及方法的详细说明,以免不必要的细节妨碍本申请的描述。In the following description, for the purpose of explanation rather than limitation, specific details such as specific system structures and technologies are provided to provide a thorough understanding of the embodiments of the present application. However, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the present application may be practiced in other embodiments without these specific details. In other instances, detailed descriptions of well-known systems, devices, circuits, and methods are omitted so as not to obscure the description of the present application with unnecessary detail.
应当理解,当在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书中使用时,术语“包括”指示所描述特征、整体、步骤、操作、元素和/或组件的存在,但并不排除一个或多个其它特征、整体、步骤、操作、元素、组件和/或其集合的存在或添加。It will be understood that, when used in this specification and the appended claims, the term "comprising" indicates the presence of the described features, integers, steps, operations, elements and/or components but does not exclude one or more other The presence or addition of features, integers, steps, operations, elements, components and/or collections thereof.
还应当理解,在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书中使用的术语“和/或”是指相关联列出的项中的一个或多个的任何组合以及所有可能组合,并且包括这些组合。It will also be understood that the term "and/or" as used in this specification and the appended claims refers to and includes any and all possible combinations of one or more of the associated listed items.
如在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书中所使用的那样,术语“如果”可以依据上下文被解释为“当...时”或“一旦”或“响应于确定”或“响应于检测到”。类似地,短语“如果确定”或“如果检测到[所描述条件或事件]”可以依据上下文被解释为意指“一旦确定”或“响应于确定”或“一旦检测到[所描述条件或事件]”或“响应于检测到[所描述条件或事件]”。As used in this specification and the appended claims, the term "if" may be interpreted as "when" or "once" or "in response to determining" or "in response to detecting" depending on the context. ". Similarly, the phrase "if determined" or "if [the described condition or event] is detected" may be interpreted, depending on the context, to mean "once determined" or "in response to a determination" or "once the [described condition or event] is detected ]" or "in response to detection of [the described condition or event]".
另外,在本申请说明书和所附权利要求书的描述中,术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”等仅用于区分描述,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性。In addition, in the description of this application and the appended claims, the terms "first", "second", "third", etc. are only used to distinguish the description, and cannot be understood as indicating or implying relative importance.
在本申请说明书中描述的参考“一个实施例”或“一些实施例”等意味着在本申请的一个或多个实施例中包括结合该实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特点。由此,在本说明书中的不同之处出现的语句“在一个实施例中”、“在一些实施例中”、“在其他一些实施例中”、“在另外一些实施例中”等不是必然都参考相同的实施例,而是意味着“一个或多个但不是所有的实施例”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。术语“包括”、“包含”、“具有”及它们的变形都意味着“包括但不限于”,除非是以其他方式另外特别强调。Reference in this specification to "one embodiment" or "some embodiments" or the like means that a particular feature, structure or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment is included in one or more embodiments of the application. Therefore, the phrases "in one embodiment", "in some embodiments", "in other embodiments", "in other embodiments", etc. appearing in different places in this specification are not necessarily References are made to the same embodiment, but rather to "one or more but not all embodiments" unless specifically stated otherwise. The terms “including,” “includes,” “having,” and variations thereof all mean “including but not limited to,” unless otherwise specifically emphasized.
本申请实施例提供的触控输入的方法可以应用于手机、平板电脑、可穿戴设备、车载设备、增强现实(augmented reality,AR)/虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备、笔记本电脑、超级移动个人计算机(ultra-mobile personal computer,UMPC)、上网本、个人数字助理(personal digital assistant,PDA)等电子设备上,特别地,该触控输入的方法可以应用于具有触控功能的平板电脑上,本申请实施例对电子设备的具体类型不作任何限制。The touch input method provided by the embodiments of this application can be applied to mobile phones, tablet computers, wearable devices, vehicle-mounted devices, augmented reality (AR)/virtual reality (VR) devices, notebook computers, and super mobile devices. On electronic devices such as personal computers (ultra-mobile personal computers, UMPCs), netbooks, and personal digital assistants (personal digital assistants, PDAs), in particular, the touch input method can be applied to tablet computers with touch functions. The embodiments of this application do not place any restrictions on the specific types of electronic devices.
例如,所述电子设备可以是WLAN中的站点(STAION,ST),可以是蜂窝电话、无绳电话、 会话启动协议(Session Initiation Protocol,SIP)电话、无线本地环路(Wireless Local Loop,WLL)站、个人数字处理(Personal Digital Assistant,PDA)设备、具有无线通信功能的手持设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其它处理设备、电脑、膝上型计算机、手持式通信设备、手持式计算设备、和/或用于在无线系统上进行通信的其它设备以及下一代通信系统,例如,5G网络中的移动终端或者未来演进的公共陆地移动网络(Public Land Mobile Network,PLMN)网络中的移动终端等。For example, the electronic device may be a station (ST) in a WLAN, a cellular phone, a cordless phone, Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, Personal Digital Assistant (PDA) device, handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, computing device or connected to Wireless modems, other processing devices, computers, laptops, handheld communication devices, handheld computing devices, and/or other devices for communicating over wireless systems and next generation communication systems, such as in 5G networks Mobile terminals or mobile terminals in the future evolved Public Land Mobile Network (Public Land Mobile Network, PLMN) network, etc.
图1示出了电子设备100的一种结构示意图。FIG. 1 shows a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 100 .
电子设备100可以包括处理器110,外部存储器接口120,内部存储器121,通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口130,充电管理模块140,电源管理模块141,电池142,天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,传感器模块180,按键190,马达191,指示器192,摄像头193,显示屏194,以及用户标识模块(subscriber identification module,SIM)卡接口195等。其中传感器模块180可以包括压力传感器180A,陀螺仪传感器180B,气压传感器180C,磁传感器180D,加速度传感器180E,距离传感器180F,接近光传感器180G,指纹传感器180H,温度传感器180J,触摸传感器180K,环境光传感器180L,骨传导传感器180M等。The electronic device 100 may include a processor 110, an external memory interface 120, an internal memory 121, a universal serial bus (USB) interface 130, a charging management module 140, a power management module 141, a battery 142, an antenna 1, an antenna 2 , mobile communication module 150, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, speaker 170A, receiver 170B, microphone 170C, headphone interface 170D, sensor module 180, button 190, motor 191, indicator 192, camera 193, display screen 194, and Subscriber identification module (SIM) card interface 195, etc. The sensor module 180 may include a pressure sensor 180A, a gyro sensor 180B, an air pressure sensor 180C, a magnetic sensor 180D, an acceleration sensor 180E, a distance sensor 180F, a proximity light sensor 180G, a fingerprint sensor 180H, a temperature sensor 180J, a touch sensor 180K, and ambient light. Sensor 180L, bone conduction sensor 180M, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的结构并不构成对电子设备100的具体限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者拆分某些部件,或者不同的部件布置。图示的部件可以以硬件,软件或软件和硬件的组合实现。It can be understood that the structure illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention does not constitute a specific limitation on the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may include more or fewer components than shown in the figures, or some components may be combined, some components may be separated, or some components may be arranged differently. The components illustrated may be implemented in hardware, software, or a combination of software and hardware.
处理器110可以包括一个或多个处理单元,例如:处理器110可以包括应用处理器(application processor,AP),调制解调处理器,图形处理器(graphics processing unit,GPU),图像信号处理器(image signal processor,ISP),控制器,视频编解码器,数字信号处理器(digital signal processor,DSP),基带处理器,和/或神经网络处理器(neural-network processing unit,NPU)等。其中,不同的处理单元可以是独立的器件,也可以集成在一个或多个处理器中。The processor 110 may include one or more processing units. For example, the processor 110 may include an application processor (application processor, AP), a modem processor, a graphics processing unit (GPU), and an image signal processor. (image signal processor, ISP), controller, video codec, digital signal processor (digital signal processor, DSP), baseband processor, and/or neural network processor (neural-network processing unit, NPU), etc. Among them, different processing units can be independent devices or integrated in one or more processors.
控制器可以根据指令操作码和时序信号,产生操作控制信号,完成取指令和执行指令的控制。The controller can generate operation control signals based on the instruction operation code and timing signals to complete the control of fetching and executing instructions.
处理器110中还可以设置存储器,用于存储指令和数据。在一些实施例中,处理器110中的存储器为高速缓冲存储器。该存储器可以保存处理器110刚用过或循环使用的指令或数据。如果处理器110需要再次使用该指令或数据,可从所述存储器中直接调用。避免了重复存取,减少了处理器110的等待时间,因而提高了系统的效率。The processor 110 may also be provided with a memory for storing instructions and data. In some embodiments, the memory in processor 110 is cache memory. This memory may hold instructions or data that have been recently used or recycled by processor 110 . If the processor 110 needs to use the instructions or data again, it can be called directly from the memory. Repeated access is avoided and the waiting time of the processor 110 is reduced, thus improving the efficiency of the system.
在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包括一个或多个接口。接口可以包括集成电路(inter-integrated circuit,I2C)接口,集成电路内置音频(inter-integrated circuit sound,I2S)接口,脉冲编码调制(pulse code modulation,PCM)接口,通用异步收发传输器(universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter,UART)接口,移动产业处理器接口(mobile industry processor interface,MIPI),通用输入输出(general-purpose input/output,GPIO)接口,用户标识模块(subscriber identity module,SIM)接口,和/或通用串行总线(universal serial bus,USB)接口等。In some embodiments, processor 110 may include one or more interfaces. Interfaces may include integrated circuit (inter-integrated circuit, I2C) interface, integrated circuit built-in audio (inter-integrated circuit sound, I2S) interface, pulse code modulation (pulse code modulation, PCM) interface, universal asynchronous receiver and transmitter (universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter (UART) interface, mobile industry processor interface (MIPI), general-purpose input/output (GPIO) interface, subscriber identity module (SIM) interface, and /or universal serial bus (USB) interface, etc.
I2C接口是一种双向同步串行总线,包括一根串行数据线(serial data line,SDA)和一根串行时钟线(derail clock line,SCL)。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2C总线。处理器110可以通过不同的I2C总线接口分别耦合触摸传感器180K,充电器,闪光灯,摄像头193等。例如:处理器110可以通过I2C接口耦合触摸传感器180K,使处理器110与触摸传感器180K通过I2C总线接口通信,实现电子设备100的触摸功能。The I2C interface is a bidirectional synchronous serial bus, including a serial data line (SDA) and a serial clock line (derail clock line, SCL). In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2C buses. The processor 110 can separately couple the touch sensor 180K, charger, flash, camera 193, etc. through different I2C bus interfaces. For example, the processor 110 can be coupled to the touch sensor 180K through an I2C interface, so that the processor 110 and the touch sensor 180K communicate through the I2C bus interface to implement the touch function of the electronic device 100 .
I2S接口可以用于音频通信。在一些实施例中,处理器110可以包含多组I2S总线。处理器110可以通过I2S总线与音频模块170耦合,实现处理器110与音频模块170之间的通信。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过I2S接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。The I2S interface can be used for audio communication. In some embodiments, processor 110 may include multiple sets of I2S buses. The processor 110 can be coupled with the audio module 170 through the I2S bus to implement communication between the processor 110 and the audio module 170 . In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the I2S interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset.
PCM接口也可以用于音频通信,将模拟信号抽样,量化和编码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170与无线通信模块160可以通过PCM总线接口耦合。在一些实施例中,音频模块170也可以通过PCM接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机接听电话的功能。所述I2S接口和所述PCM接口都可以用于音频通信。The PCM interface can also be used for audio communications to sample, quantize and encode analog signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 and the wireless communication module 160 may be coupled through a PCM bus interface. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can also transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the PCM interface to implement the function of answering calls through a Bluetooth headset. Both the I2S interface and the PCM interface can be used for audio communication.
UART接口是一种通用串行数据总线,用于异步通信。该总线可以为双向通信总线。它将要 传输的数据在串行通信与并行通信之间转换。在一些实施例中,UART接口通常被用于连接处理器110与无线通信模块160。例如:处理器110通过UART接口与无线通信模块160中的蓝牙模块通信,实现蓝牙功能。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以通过UART接口向无线通信模块160传递音频信号,实现通过蓝牙耳机播放音乐的功能。The UART interface is a universal serial data bus used for asynchronous communication. The bus can be a bidirectional communication bus. it will be The transmitted data is converted between serial and parallel communication. In some embodiments, a UART interface is generally used to connect the processor 110 and the wireless communication module 160 . For example, the processor 110 communicates with the Bluetooth module in the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the Bluetooth function. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 can transmit audio signals to the wireless communication module 160 through the UART interface to implement the function of playing music through a Bluetooth headset.
MIPI接口可以被用于连接处理器110与显示屏194,摄像头193等外围器件。MIPI接口包括摄像头串行接口(camera serial interface,CSI),显示屏串行接口(display serial interface,DSI)等。在一些实施例中,处理器110和摄像头193通过CSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的拍摄功能。处理器110和显示屏194通过DSI接口通信,实现电子设备100的显示功能。The MIPI interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with peripheral devices such as the display screen 194 and the camera 193 . MIPI interfaces include camera serial interface (CSI), display serial interface (DSI), etc. In some embodiments, the processor 110 and the camera 193 communicate through the CSI interface to implement the shooting function of the electronic device 100 . The processor 110 and the display screen 194 communicate through the DSI interface to implement the display function of the electronic device 100 .
GPIO接口可以通过软件配置。GPIO接口可以被配置为控制信号,也可被配置为数据信号。在一些实施例中,GPIO接口可以用于连接处理器110与摄像头193,显示屏194,无线通信模块160,音频模块170,传感器模块180等。GPIO接口还可以被配置为I2C接口,I2S接口,UART接口,MIPI接口等。The GPIO interface can be configured through software. The GPIO interface can be configured as a control signal or as a data signal. In some embodiments, the GPIO interface can be used to connect the processor 110 with the camera 193, display screen 194, wireless communication module 160, audio module 170, sensor module 180, etc. The GPIO interface can also be configured as an I2C interface, I2S interface, UART interface, MIPI interface, etc.
USB接口130是符合USB标准规范的接口,具体可以是Mini USB接口,Micro USB接口,USB Type C接口等。USB接口130可以用于连接充电器为电子设备100充电,也可以用于电子设备100与外围设备之间传输数据。也可以用于连接耳机,通过耳机播放音频。该接口还可以用于连接其他电子设备,例如AR设备等。The USB interface 130 is an interface that complies with the USB standard specification, and may be a Mini USB interface, a Micro USB interface, a USB Type C interface, etc. The USB interface 130 can be used to connect a charger to charge the electronic device 100, and can also be used to transmit data between the electronic device 100 and peripheral devices. It can also be used to connect headphones to play audio through them. This interface can also be used to connect other electronic devices, such as AR devices, etc.
可以理解的是,本发明实施例示意的各模块间的接口连接关系,只是示意性说明,并不构成对电子设备100的结构限定。在本申请另一些实施例中,电子设备100也可以采用上述实施例中不同的接口连接方式,或多种接口连接方式的组合。It can be understood that the interface connection relationships between the modules illustrated in the embodiment of the present invention are only schematic illustrations and do not constitute a structural limitation of the electronic device 100 . In other embodiments of the present application, the electronic device 100 may also adopt different interface connection methods in the above embodiments, or a combination of multiple interface connection methods.
充电管理模块140用于从充电器接收充电输入。其中,充电器可以是无线充电器,也可以是有线充电器。在一些有线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过USB接口130接收有线充电器的充电输入。在一些无线充电的实施例中,充电管理模块140可以通过电子设备100的无线充电线圈接收无线充电输入。充电管理模块140为电池142充电的同时,还可以通过电源管理模块141为电子设备供电。The charging management module 140 is used to receive charging input from the charger. Among them, the charger can be a wireless charger or a wired charger. In some wired charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive charging input from the wired charger through the USB interface 130 . In some wireless charging embodiments, the charging management module 140 may receive wireless charging input through the wireless charging coil of the electronic device 100 . While the charging management module 140 charges the battery 142, it can also provide power to the electronic device through the power management module 141.
电源管理模块141用于连接电池142,充电管理模块140与处理器110。电源管理模块141接收电池142和/或充电管理模块140的输入,为处理器110,内部存储器121,显示屏194,摄像头193,和无线通信模块160等供电。电源管理模块141还可以用于监测电池容量,电池循环次数,电池健康状态(漏电,阻抗)等参数。在其他一些实施例中,电源管理模块141也可以设置于处理器110中。在另一些实施例中,电源管理模块141和充电管理模块140也可以设置于同一个器件中。The power management module 141 is used to connect the battery 142, the charging management module 140 and the processor 110. The power management module 141 receives input from the battery 142 and/or the charging management module 140, and supplies power to the processor 110, the internal memory 121, the display screen 194, the camera 193, the wireless communication module 160, and the like. The power management module 141 can also be used to monitor battery capacity, battery cycle times, battery health status (leakage, impedance) and other parameters. In some other embodiments, the power management module 141 may also be provided in the processor 110 . In other embodiments, the power management module 141 and the charging management module 140 may also be provided in the same device.
电子设备100的无线通信功能可以通过天线1,天线2,移动通信模块150,无线通信模块160,调制解调处理器以及基带处理器等实现。The wireless communication function of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the antenna 1, the antenna 2, the mobile communication module 150, the wireless communication module 160, the modem processor and the baseband processor.
天线1和天线2用于发射和接收电磁波信号。电子设备100中的每个天线可用于覆盖单个或多个通信频带。不同的天线还可以复用,以提高天线的利用率。例如:可以将天线1复用为无线局域网的分集天线。在另外一些实施例中,天线可以和调谐开关结合使用。Antenna 1 and Antenna 2 are used to transmit and receive electromagnetic wave signals. Each antenna in electronic device 100 may be used to cover a single or multiple communication frequency bands. Different antennas can also be reused to improve antenna utilization. For example: Antenna 1 can be reused as a diversity antenna for a wireless LAN. In other embodiments, antennas may be used in conjunction with tuning switches.
移动通信模块150可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块150可以包括至少一个滤波器,开关,功率放大器,低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier,LNA)等。移动通信模块150可以由天线1接收电磁波,并对接收的电磁波进行滤波,放大等处理,传送至调制解调处理器进行解调。移动通信模块150还可以对经调制解调处理器调制后的信号放大,经天线1转为电磁波辐射出去。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以被设置于处理器110中。在一些实施例中,移动通信模块150的至少部分功能模块可以与处理器110的至少部分模块被设置在同一个器件中。The mobile communication module 150 can provide solutions for wireless communication including 2G/3G/4G/5G applied on the electronic device 100 . The mobile communication module 150 may include at least one filter, switch, power amplifier, low noise amplifier (LNA), etc. The mobile communication module 150 can receive electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1, perform filtering, amplification and other processing on the received electromagnetic waves, and transmit them to the modem processor for demodulation. The mobile communication module 150 can also amplify the signal modulated by the modem processor and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 1 for radiation. In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 may be disposed in the processor 110 . In some embodiments, at least part of the functional modules of the mobile communication module 150 and at least part of the modules of the processor 110 may be provided in the same device.
调制解调处理器可以包括调制器和解调器。其中,调制器用于将待发送的低频基带信号调制成中高频信号。解调器用于将接收的电磁波信号解调为低频基带信号。随后解调器将解调得到的低频基带信号传送至基带处理器处理。低频基带信号经基带处理器处理后,被传递给应用处理器。应用处理器通过音频设备(不限于扬声器170A,受话器170B等)输出声音信号,或通过显示屏194显示图像或视频。在一些实施例中,调制解调处理器可以是独立的器件。在另一些实施例中,调 制解调处理器可以独立于处理器110,与移动通信模块150或其他功能模块设置在同一个器件中。A modem processor may include a modulator and a demodulator. Among them, the modulator is used to modulate the low-frequency baseband signal to be sent into a medium-high frequency signal. The demodulator is used to demodulate the received electromagnetic wave signal into a low-frequency baseband signal. The demodulator then transmits the demodulated low-frequency baseband signal to the baseband processor for processing. After the low-frequency baseband signal is processed by the baseband processor, it is passed to the application processor. The application processor outputs sound signals through audio devices (not limited to speaker 170A, receiver 170B, etc.), or displays images or videos through display screen 194. In some embodiments, the modem processor may be a stand-alone device. In other embodiments, adjust The modem and demodulation processor may be independent of the processor 110 and may be provided in the same device as the mobile communication module 150 or other functional modules.
无线通信模块160可以提供应用在电子设备100上的包括无线局域网(wireless local area networks,WLAN)(如无线保真(wireless fidelity,Wi-Fi)网络),蓝牙(bluetooth,BT),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GNSS),调频(frequency modulation,FM),近距离无线通信技术(near field communication,NFC),红外技术(infrared,IR)等无线通信的解决方案。无线通信模块160可以是集成至少一个通信处理模块的一个或多个器件。无线通信模块160经由天线2接收电磁波,将电磁波信号调频以及滤波处理,将处理后的信号发送到处理器110。无线通信模块160还可以从处理器110接收待发送的信号,对其进行调频,放大,经天线2转为电磁波辐射出去。The wireless communication module 160 can provide applications on the electronic device 100 including wireless local area networks (WLAN) (such as wireless fidelity (Wi-Fi) network), Bluetooth (bluetooth, BT), and global navigation satellites. System (global navigation satellite system, GNSS), frequency modulation (frequency modulation, FM), near field communication technology (near field communication, NFC), infrared technology (infrared, IR) and other wireless communication solutions. The wireless communication module 160 may be one or more devices integrating at least one communication processing module. The wireless communication module 160 receives electromagnetic waves via the antenna 2 , frequency modulates and filters the electromagnetic wave signals, and sends the processed signals to the processor 110 . The wireless communication module 160 can also receive the signal to be sent from the processor 110, frequency modulate it, amplify it, and convert it into electromagnetic waves through the antenna 2 for radiation.
在一些实施例中,电子设备100的天线1和移动通信模块150耦合,天线2和无线通信模块160耦合,使得电子设备100可以通过无线通信技术与网络以及其他设备通信。所述无线通信技术可以包括全球移动通讯系统(global system for mobile communications,GSM),通用分组无线服务(general packet radio service,GPRS),码分多址接入(code division multiple access,CDMA),宽带码分多址(wideband code division multiple access,WCDMA),时分码分多址(time-division code division multiple access,TD-SCDMA),长期演进(long term evolution,LTE),BT,GNSS,WLAN,NFC,FM,和/或IR技术等。所述GNSS可以包括全球卫星定位系统(global positioning system,GPS),全球导航卫星系统(global navigation satellite system,GLONASS),北斗卫星导航系统(beidou navigation satellite system,BDS),准天顶卫星系统(quasi-zenith satellite system,QZSS)和/或星基增强系统(satellite based augmentation systems,SBAS)。In some embodiments, the antenna 1 of the electronic device 100 is coupled to the mobile communication module 150, and the antenna 2 is coupled to the wireless communication module 160, so that the electronic device 100 can communicate with the network and other devices through wireless communication technology. The wireless communication technology may include global system for mobile communications (GSM), general packet radio service (GPRS), code division multiple access (CDMA), broadband Code division multiple access (wideband code division multiple access, WCDMA), time division code division multiple access (time-division code division multiple access, TD-SCDMA), long term evolution (long term evolution, LTE), BT, GNSS, WLAN, NFC , FM, and/or IR technology, etc. The GNSS may include global positioning system (GPS), global navigation satellite system (GLONASS), Beidou navigation satellite system (BDS), quasi-zenith satellite system (quasi) -zenith satellite system (QZSS) and/or satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS).
电子设备100通过GPU,显示屏194,以及应用处理器等实现显示功能。GPU为图像处理的微处理器,连接显示屏194和应用处理器。GPU用于执行数学和几何计算,用于图形渲染。处理器110可包括一个或多个GPU,其执行程序指令以生成或改变显示信息。其中,上述显示屏194具体可以显示生成的检测报告,以便用户可以通过显示屏194查看检测报告。The electronic device 100 implements display functions through a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like. The GPU is an image processing microprocessor and is connected to the display screen 194 and the application processor. GPUs are used to perform mathematical and geometric calculations for graphics rendering. Processor 110 may include one or more GPUs that execute program instructions to generate or alter display information. The above-mentioned display screen 194 can specifically display the generated detection report, so that the user can view the detection report through the display screen 194 .
显示屏194用于显示图像,视频等。显示屏194包括显示面板。显示面板可以采用液晶显示屏(liquid crystal display,LCD),有机发光二极管(organic light-emitting diode,OLED),有源矩阵有机发光二极体或主动矩阵有机发光二极体(active-matrix organic light emitting diode,AMOLED),柔性发光二极管(flex light-emitting diode,FLED),Miniled,MicroLed,Micro-oLed,量子点发光二极管(quantum dot light emitting diodes,QLED)等。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个显示屏194,N为大于1的正整数。显示屏194可包括触控面板以及其他输入设备。The display screen 194 is used to display images, videos, etc. Display 194 includes a display panel. The display panel can use a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light-emitting diode (OLED), an active matrix organic light emitting diode or an active matrix organic light emitting diode (active-matrix organic light emitting diode). emitting diode (AMOLED), flexible light-emitting diode (FLED), Miniled, MicroLed, Micro-oLed, quantum dot light emitting diode (QLED), etc. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N display screens 194, where N is a positive integer greater than 1. Display 194 may include a touch panel as well as other input devices.
电子设备100可以通过ISP,摄像头193,视频编解码器,GPU,显示屏194以及应用处理器等实现拍摄功能。The electronic device 100 can implement the shooting function through an ISP, a camera 193, a video codec, a GPU, a display screen 194, an application processor, and the like.
ISP用于处理摄像头193反馈的数据。例如,拍照时,打开快门,光线通过镜头被传递到摄像头感光元件上,光信号转换为电信号,摄像头感光元件将所述电信号传递给ISP处理,转化为肉眼可见的图像。ISP还可以对图像的噪点,亮度,肤色进行算法优化。ISP还可以对拍摄场景的曝光,色温等参数优化。在一些实施例中,ISP可以设置在摄像头193中。The ISP is used to process the data fed back by the camera 193. For example, when taking a photo, the shutter is opened, the light is transmitted to the camera sensor through the lens, the optical signal is converted into an electrical signal, and the camera sensor passes the electrical signal to the ISP for processing, and converts it into an image visible to the naked eye. ISP can also perform algorithm optimization on image noise, brightness, and skin color. ISP can also optimize the exposure, color temperature and other parameters of the shooting scene. In some embodiments, the ISP may be provided in the camera 193.
摄像头193用于捕获静态图像或视频。物体通过镜头生成光学图像投射到感光元件。感光元件可以是电荷耦合器件(charge coupled device,CCD)或互补金属氧化物半导体(complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor,CMOS)光电晶体管。感光元件把光信号转换成电信号,之后将电信号传递给ISP转换成数字图像信号。ISP将数字图像信号输出到DSP加工处理。DSP将数字图像信号转换成标准的RGB,YUV等格式的图像信号。在一些实施例中,电子设备100可以包括1个或N个摄像头193,N为大于1的正整数。Camera 193 is used to capture still images or video. The object passes through the lens to produce an optical image that is projected onto the photosensitive element. The photosensitive element can be a charge coupled device (CCD) or a complementary metal-oxide-semiconductor (CMOS) phototransistor. The photosensitive element converts the optical signal into an electrical signal, and then passes the electrical signal to the ISP to convert it into a digital image signal. ISP outputs digital image signals to DSP for processing. DSP converts digital image signals into standard RGB, YUV and other format image signals. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 may include 1 or N cameras 193, where N is a positive integer greater than 1.
数字信号处理器用于处理数字信号,除了可以处理数字图像信号,还可以处理其他数字信号。例如,当电子设备100在频点选择时,数字信号处理器用于对频点能量进行傅里叶变换等。Digital signal processors are used to process digital signals. In addition to digital image signals, they can also process other digital signals. For example, when the electronic device 100 selects a frequency point, the digital signal processor is used to perform Fourier transform on the frequency point energy.
视频编解码器用于对数字视频压缩或解压缩。电子设备100可以支持一种或多种视频编解码器。这样,电子设备100可以播放或录制多种编码格式的视频,例如:动态图像专家组(moving picture experts group,MPEG)1,MPEG2,MPEG3,MPEG4等。Video codecs are used to compress or decompress digital video. Electronic device 100 may support one or more video codecs. In this way, the electronic device 100 can play or record videos in multiple encoding formats, such as moving picture experts group (MPEG) 1, MPEG2, MPEG3, MPEG4, etc.
NPU为神经网络(neural-network,NN)计算处理器,通过借鉴生物神经网络结构,例如借鉴 人脑神经元之间传递模式,对输入信息快速处理,还可以不断的自学习。通过NPU可以实现电子设备100的智能认知等应用,例如:图像识别,脸部识别,语音识别,文本理解等。NPU is a neural-network (NN) computing processor. It draws on the structure of biological neural networks, such as The human brain transmits patterns between neurons, processes input information quickly, and can continuously learn by itself. Intelligent cognitive applications of the electronic device 100 can be implemented through the NPU, such as image recognition, face recognition, speech recognition, text understanding, etc.
外部存储器接口120可以用于连接外部存储卡,例如Micro SD卡,实现扩展电子设备100的存储能力。外部存储卡通过外部存储器接口120与处理器110通信,实现数据存储功能。例如将音乐,视频等文件保存在外部存储卡中。The external memory interface 120 can be used to connect an external memory card, such as a Micro SD card, to expand the storage capacity of the electronic device 100. The external memory card communicates with the processor 110 through the external memory interface 120 to implement the data storage function. Such as saving music, videos, etc. files in external memory card.
内部存储器121可以用于存储计算机可执行程序代码,所述可执行程序代码包括指令。内部存储器121可以包括存储程序区和存储数据区。其中,存储程序区可存储操作系统,至少一个功能所需的应用程序(比如声音播放功能,图像播放功能等)等。存储数据区可存储电子设备100使用过程中所创建的数据(比如音频数据,电话本等)等。此外,内部存储器121可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如至少一个磁盘存储器件,闪存器件,通用闪存存储器(universal flash storage,UFS)等。处理器110通过运行存储在内部存储器121的指令,和/或存储在设置于处理器中的存储器的指令,执行电子设备100的各种功能应用以及数据处理。Internal memory 121 may be used to store computer executable program code, which includes instructions. The internal memory 121 may include a program storage area and a data storage area. Among them, the stored program area can store an operating system, at least one application program required for a function (such as a sound playback function, an image playback function, etc.). The storage data area may store data created during use of the electronic device 100 (such as audio data, phone book, etc.). In addition, the internal memory 121 may include high-speed random access memory, and may also include non-volatile memory, such as at least one disk storage device, flash memory device, universal flash storage (UFS), etc. The processor 110 executes various functional applications and data processing of the electronic device 100 by executing instructions stored in the internal memory 121 and/or instructions stored in a memory provided in the processor.
电子设备100可以通过音频模块170,扬声器170A,受话器170B,麦克风170C,耳机接口170D,以及应用处理器等实现音频功能。例如音乐播放,录音等。The electronic device 100 can implement audio functions through the audio module 170, the speaker 170A, the receiver 170B, the microphone 170C, the headphone interface 170D, and the application processor. Such as music playback, recording, etc.
音频模块170用于将数字音频信息转换成模拟音频信号输出,也用于将模拟音频输入转换为数字音频信号。音频模块170还可以用于对音频信号编码和解码。在一些实施例中,音频模块170可以设置于处理器110中,或将音频模块170的部分功能模块设置于处理器110中。The audio module 170 is used to convert digital audio information into analog audio signal output, and is also used to convert analog audio input into digital audio signals. Audio module 170 may also be used to encode and decode audio signals. In some embodiments, the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 , or some functional modules of the audio module 170 may be provided in the processor 110 .
扬声器170A,也称“喇叭”,用于将音频电信号转换为声音信号。电子设备100可以通过扬声器170A收听音乐,或收听免提通话。特别地,上述扬声器170A可以用于输出提示信息,用于通知用户需要与电子秤接触的部位。Speaker 170A, also called "speaker", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. The electronic device 100 can listen to music through the speaker 170A, or listen to hands-free calls. In particular, the above-mentioned speaker 170A can be used to output prompt information to notify the user of the parts that need to be contacted with the electronic scale.
受话器170B,也称“听筒”,用于将音频电信号转换成声音信号。当电子设备100接听电话或语音信息时,可以通过将受话器170B靠近人耳接听语音。Receiver 170B, also called "earpiece", is used to convert audio electrical signals into sound signals. When the electronic device 100 answers a call or a voice message, the voice can be heard by bringing the receiver 170B close to the human ear.
麦克风170C,也称“话筒”,“传声器”,用于将声音信号转换为电信号。当拨打电话或发送语音信息时,用户可以通过人嘴靠近麦克风170C发声,将声音信号输入到麦克风170C。电子设备100可以设置至少一个麦克风170C。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100可以设置两个麦克风170C,除了采集声音信号,还可以实现降噪功能。在另一些实施例中,电子设备100还可以设置三个,四个或更多麦克风170C,实现采集声音信号,降噪,还可以识别声音来源,实现定向录音功能等。Microphone 170C, also called "microphone" or "microphone", is used to convert sound signals into electrical signals. When making a call or sending a voice message, the user can speak close to the microphone 170C with the human mouth and input the sound signal to the microphone 170C. The electronic device 100 may be provided with at least one microphone 170C. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 may be provided with two microphones 170C, which in addition to collecting sound signals, may also implement a noise reduction function. In other embodiments, the electronic device 100 can also be provided with three, four or more microphones 170C to collect sound signals, reduce noise, identify sound sources, and implement directional recording functions, etc.
耳机接口170D用于连接有线耳机。耳机接口170D可以是USB接口130,也可以是3.5mm的开放移动电子设备平台(open mobile terminal platform,OMTP)标准接口,美国蜂窝电信工业协会(cellular telecommunications industry association of the USA,CTIA)标准接口。The headphone interface 170D is used to connect wired headphones. The headphone interface 170D may be a USB interface 130, or may be a 3.5mm open mobile terminal platform (OMTP) standard interface, or a Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association of the USA (CTIA) standard interface.
压力传感器180A用于感受压力信号,可以将压力信号转换成电信号。在一些实施例中,压力传感器180A可以设置于显示屏194,例如电子设备可以通过压力传感器180A获取用户的体重。压力传感器180A的种类很多,如电阻式压力传感器,电感式压力传感器,电容式压力传感器等。电容式压力传感器可以是包括至少两个具有导电材料的平行板。当有力作用于压力传感器180A,电极之间的电容改变。电子设备100根据电容的变化确定压力的强度。当有触摸操作作用于显示屏194,电子设备100根据压力传感器180A检测所述触摸操作强度。电子设备100也可以根据压力传感器180A的检测信号计算触摸的位置。在一些实施例中,作用于相同触摸位置,但不同触摸操作强度的触摸操作,可以对应不同的操作指令。例如:当有触摸操作强度小于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行查看短消息的指令。当有触摸操作强度大于或等于第一压力阈值的触摸操作作用于短消息应用图标时,执行新建短消息的指令。The pressure sensor 180A is used to sense pressure signals and can convert the pressure signals into electrical signals. In some embodiments, the pressure sensor 180A can be disposed on the display screen 194. For example, the electronic device can obtain the user's weight through the pressure sensor 180A. There are many types of pressure sensors 180A, such as resistive pressure sensors, inductive pressure sensors, capacitive pressure sensors, etc. A capacitive pressure sensor may include at least two parallel plates of conductive material. When a force is applied to pressure sensor 180A, the capacitance between the electrodes changes. The electronic device 100 determines the intensity of the pressure based on the change in capacitance. When a touch operation is performed on the display screen 194, the electronic device 100 detects the intensity of the touch operation according to the pressure sensor 180A. The electronic device 100 may also calculate the touched position based on the detection signal of the pressure sensor 180A. In some embodiments, touch operations acting on the same touch location but with different touch operation intensities may correspond to different operation instructions. For example: when a touch operation with a touch operation intensity less than the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to view the short message is executed. When a touch operation with a touch operation intensity greater than or equal to the first pressure threshold is applied to the short message application icon, an instruction to create a new short message is executed.
陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于确定电子设备100的运动姿态。在一些实施例中,可以通过陀螺仪传感器180B确定电子设备100围绕三个轴(即,x,y和z轴)的角速度。陀螺仪传感器180B可以用于拍摄防抖。示例性的,当按下快门,陀螺仪传感器180B检测电子设备100抖动的角度,根据角度计算出镜头模组需要补偿的距离,让镜头通过反向运动抵消电子设备100的抖动,实现防抖。陀螺仪传感器180B还可以用于导航,体感游戏场景。The gyro sensor 180B may be used to determine the motion posture of the electronic device 100 . In some embodiments, the angular velocity of electronic device 100 about three axes (ie, x, y, and z axes) may be determined by gyro sensor 180B. The gyro sensor 180B can be used for image stabilization. For example, when the shutter is pressed, the gyro sensor 180B detects the angle at which the electronic device 100 shakes, calculates the distance that the lens module needs to compensate based on the angle, and allows the lens to offset the shake of the electronic device 100 through reverse movement to achieve anti-shake. The gyro sensor 180B can also be used for navigation and somatosensory game scenes.
气压传感器180C用于测量气压。在一些实施例中,电子设备100通过气压传感器180C测得的气压值计算海拔高度,辅助定位和导航。 Air pressure sensor 180C is used to measure air pressure. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 calculates the altitude through the air pressure value measured by the air pressure sensor 180C to assist positioning and navigation.
磁传感器180D包括霍尔传感器。电子设备100可以利用磁传感器180D检测翻盖皮套的开合。在一些实施例中,当电子设备100是翻盖机时,电子设备100可以根据磁传感器180D检测翻盖的开合。进而根据检测到的皮套的开合状态或翻盖的开合状态,设置翻盖自动解锁等特性。Magnetic sensor 180D includes a Hall sensor. The electronic device 100 may utilize the magnetic sensor 180D to detect opening and closing of the flip holster. In some embodiments, when the electronic device 100 is a flip machine, the electronic device 100 may detect the opening and closing of the flip according to the magnetic sensor 180D. Then, based on the detected opening and closing status of the leather case or the opening and closing status of the flip cover, features such as automatic unlocking of the flip cover are set.
加速度传感器180E可检测电子设备100在各个方向上(一般为三轴)加速度的大小。当电子设备100静止时可检测出重力的大小及方向。还可以用于识别电子设备姿态,应用于横竖屏切换,计步器等应用。The acceleration sensor 180E can detect the acceleration of the electronic device 100 in various directions (generally three axes). When the electronic device 100 is stationary, the magnitude and direction of gravity can be detected. It can also be used to identify the posture of electronic devices and be used in horizontal and vertical screen switching, pedometer and other applications.
距离传感器180F,用于测量距离。电子设备100可以通过红外或激光测量距离。在一些实施例中,拍摄场景,电子设备100可以利用距离传感器180F测距以实现快速对焦。Distance sensor 180F for measuring distance. Electronic device 100 can measure distance via infrared or laser. In some embodiments, when shooting a scene, the electronic device 100 may utilize the distance sensor 180F to measure distance to achieve fast focusing.
接近光传感器180G可以包括例如发光二极管(LED)和光检测器,例如光电二极管。发光二极管可以是红外发光二极管。电子设备100通过发光二极管向外发射红外光。电子设备100使用光电二极管检测来自附近物体的红外反射光。当检测到充分的反射光时,可以确定电子设备100附近有物体。当检测到不充分的反射光时,电子设备100可以确定电子设备100附近没有物体。电子设备100可以利用接近光传感器180G检测用户手持电子设备100贴近耳朵通话,以便自动熄灭屏幕达到省电的目的。接近光传感器180G也可用于皮套模式,口袋模式自动解锁与锁屏。Proximity light sensor 180G may include, for example, a light emitting diode (LED) and a light detector, such as a photodiode. The light emitting diode may be an infrared light emitting diode. The electronic device 100 emits infrared light outwardly through the light emitting diode. Electronic device 100 uses photodiodes to detect infrared reflected light from nearby objects. When sufficient reflected light is detected, it can be determined that there is an object near the electronic device 100 . When insufficient reflected light is detected, the electronic device 100 may determine that there is no object near the electronic device 100 . The electronic device 100 can use the proximity light sensor 180G to detect when the user holds the electronic device 100 close to the ear for talking, so as to automatically turn off the screen to save power. The proximity light sensor 180G can also be used in holster mode, and pocket mode automatically unlocks and locks the screen.
环境光传感器180L用于感知环境光亮度。电子设备100可以根据感知的环境光亮度自适应调节显示屏194亮度。环境光传感器180L也可用于拍照时自动调节白平衡。环境光传感器180L还可以与接近光传感器180G配合,检测电子设备100是否在口袋里,以防误触。The ambient light sensor 180L is used to sense ambient light brightness. The electronic device 100 can adaptively adjust the brightness of the display screen 194 according to the perceived ambient light brightness. The ambient light sensor 180L can also be used to automatically adjust the white balance when taking pictures. The ambient light sensor 180L can also cooperate with the proximity light sensor 180G to detect whether the electronic device 100 is in the pocket to prevent accidental touching.
指纹传感器180H用于采集指纹。电子设备100可以利用采集的指纹特性实现指纹解锁,访问应用锁,指纹拍照,指纹接听来电等。Fingerprint sensor 180H is used to collect fingerprints. The electronic device 100 can use the collected fingerprint characteristics to achieve fingerprint unlocking, access to application locks, fingerprint photography, fingerprint answering of incoming calls, etc.
温度传感器180J用于检测温度。在一些实施例中,电子设备100利用温度传感器180J检测的温度,执行温度处理策略。例如,当温度传感器180J上报的温度超过阈值,电子设备100执行降低位于温度传感器180J附近的处理器的性能,以便降低功耗实施热保护。在另一些实施例中,当温度低于另一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142加热,以避免低温导致电子设备100异常关机。在其他一些实施例中,当温度低于又一阈值时,电子设备100对电池142的输出电压执行升压,以避免低温导致的异常关机。Temperature sensor 180J is used to detect temperature. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 utilizes the temperature detected by the temperature sensor 180J to execute the temperature processing strategy. For example, when the temperature reported by the temperature sensor 180J exceeds a threshold, the electronic device 100 reduces the performance of a processor located near the temperature sensor 180J in order to reduce power consumption and implement thermal protection. In other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 heats the battery 142 to prevent the low temperature from causing the electronic device 100 to shut down abnormally. In some other embodiments, when the temperature is lower than another threshold, the electronic device 100 performs boosting on the output voltage of the battery 142 to avoid abnormal shutdown caused by low temperature.
触摸传感器180K,也称“触控器件”。触摸传感器180K可以设置于显示屏194,由触摸传感器180K与显示屏194组成触摸屏,也称“触控屏”。触摸传感器180K用于检测作用于其上或附近的触摸操作。触摸传感器可以将检测到的触摸操作传递给应用处理器,以确定触摸事件类型。可以通过显示屏194提供与触摸操作相关的视觉输出。在另一些实施例中,触摸传感器180K也可以设置于电子设备100的表面,与显示屏194所处的位置不同。Touch sensor 180K, also known as "touch device". The touch sensor 180K can be disposed on the display screen 194. The touch sensor 180K and the display screen 194 form a touch screen, which is also called a "touch screen". The touch sensor 180K is used to detect a touch operation on or near the touch sensor 180K. The touch sensor can pass the detected touch operation to the application processor to determine the touch event type. Visual output related to the touch operation may be provided through display screen 194 . In other embodiments, the touch sensor 180K may also be disposed on the surface of the electronic device 100 at a location different from that of the display screen 194 .
骨传导传感器180M可以获取振动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M可以获取人体声部振动骨块的振动信号。骨传导传感器180M也可以接触人体脉搏,接收血压跳动信号。在一些实施例中,骨传导传感器180M也可以设置于耳机中,结合成骨传导耳机。音频模块170可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的声部振动骨块的振动信号,解析出语音信号,实现语音功能。应用处理器可以基于所述骨传导传感器180M获取的血压跳动信号解析心率信息,实现心率检测功能。Bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire vibration signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can acquire the vibration signal of the vibrating bone mass of the human body's vocal part. The bone conduction sensor 180M can also contact the human body's pulse and receive blood pressure beating signals. In some embodiments, the bone conduction sensor 180M can also be provided in an earphone and combined into a bone conduction earphone. The audio module 170 can analyze the voice signal based on the vibration signal of the vocal vibrating bone obtained by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the voice function. The application processor can analyze the heart rate information based on the blood pressure beating signal acquired by the bone conduction sensor 180M to implement the heart rate detection function.
按键190包括开机键,音量键等。按键190可以是机械按键。也可以是触摸式按键。电子设备100可以接收按键输入,产生与电子设备100的用户设置以及功能控制有关的键信号输入。The buttons 190 include a power button, a volume button, etc. Key 190 may be a mechanical key. It can also be a touch button. The electronic device 100 may receive key inputs and generate key signal inputs related to user settings and function control of the electronic device 100 .
马达191可以产生振动提示。马达191可以用于来电振动提示,也可以用于触摸振动反馈。例如,作用于不同应用(例如拍照,音频播放等)的触摸操作,可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。作用于显示屏194不同区域的触摸操作,马达191也可对应不同的振动反馈效果。不同的应用场景(例如:时间提醒,接收信息,闹钟,游戏等)也可以对应不同的振动反馈效果。触摸振动反馈效果还可以支持自定义。The motor 191 can generate vibration prompts. The motor 191 can be used for vibration prompts for incoming calls and can also be used for touch vibration feedback. For example, touch operations for different applications (such as taking pictures, audio playback, etc.) can correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The motor 191 can also respond to different vibration feedback effects for touch operations in different areas of the display screen 194 . Different application scenarios (such as time reminders, receiving information, alarm clocks, games, etc.) can also correspond to different vibration feedback effects. The touch vibration feedback effect can also be customized.
指示器192可以是指示灯,可以用于指示充电状态,电量变化,也可以用于指示消息,未接来电,通知等。The indicator 192 may be an indicator light, which may be used to indicate charging status, power changes, or may be used to indicate messages, missed calls, notifications, etc.
SIM卡接口195用于连接SIM卡。SIM卡可以通过插入SIM卡接口195,或从SIM卡接口195拔出,实现和电子设备100的接触和分离。电子设备100可以支持1个或N个SIM卡接口, N为大于1的正整数。SIM卡接口195可以支持Nano SIM卡,Micro SIM卡,SIM卡等。同一个SIM卡接口195可以同时插入多张卡。所述多张卡的类型可以相同,也可以不同。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容不同类型的SIM卡。SIM卡接口195也可以兼容外部存储卡。电子设备100通过SIM卡和网络交互,实现通话以及数据通信等功能。在一些实施例中,电子设备100采用eSIM,即:嵌入式SIM卡。eSIM卡可以嵌在电子设备100中,不能和电子设备100分离。The SIM card interface 195 is used to connect a SIM card. The SIM card can be connected to or separated from the electronic device 100 by inserting it into the SIM card interface 195 or pulling it out from the SIM card interface 195 . The electronic device 100 can support 1 or N SIM card interfaces, N is a positive integer greater than 1. SIM card interface 195 can support Nano SIM card, Micro SIM card, SIM card, etc. Multiple cards can be inserted into the same SIM card interface 195 at the same time. The types of the plurality of cards may be the same or different. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with different types of SIM cards. The SIM card interface 195 is also compatible with external memory cards. The electronic device 100 interacts with the network through the SIM card to implement functions such as calls and data communications. In some embodiments, the electronic device 100 uses an eSIM, that is, an embedded SIM card. The eSIM card can be embedded in the electronic device 100 and cannot be separated from the electronic device 100 .
电子设备100的软件系统可以采用分层架构,事件驱动架构,微核架构,微服务架构,或云架构。本发明实施例以分层架构的Android系统为例,示例性说明电子设备100的软件结构。The software system of the electronic device 100 may adopt a layered architecture, an event-driven architecture, a microkernel architecture, a microservice architecture, or a cloud architecture. This embodiment of the present invention takes the Android system with a layered architecture as an example to illustrate the software structure of the electronic device 100 .
图2是本申请实施例的电子设备的一种软件结构框图。Figure 2 is a software structure block diagram of the electronic device according to the embodiment of the present application.
分层架构将软件分成若干个层,每一层都有清晰的角色和分工。层与层之间通过软件接口通信。在一些实施例中,将Android系统分为四层,从上至下分别为应用程序层,应用程序框架层,安卓运行时(Android runtime)的系统层,以及内核层。The layered architecture divides the software into several layers, and each layer has clear roles and division of labor. The layers communicate through software interfaces. In some embodiments, the Android system is divided into four layers. From top to bottom, they are the application layer, the application framework layer, the system layer of the Android runtime (Android runtime), and the kernel layer.
应用程序层可以包括一系列应用程序包。The application layer can include a series of application packages.
如图2所示,应用程序包可以包括相机,日历,地图,WLAN,蓝牙,音乐,视频,短信息、邮箱、微信、WPS等应用程序。As shown in Figure 2, the application package can include applications such as camera, calendar, map, WLAN, Bluetooth, music, video, short message, mailbox, WeChat, WPS, etc.
应用程序框架层为应用程序层的应用程序提供应用编程接口(application programmingThe application framework layer provides application programming interfaces (application programming) for applications in the application layer.
interface,API)和编程框架。应用程序框架层包括一些预先定义的函数。interface, API) and programming framework. The application framework layer includes some predefined functions.
如图2所示,应用程序框架层可以包括窗口管理器,内容提供器,视图系统,电话管理器,资源管理器,通知管理器等。As shown in Figure 2, the application framework layer can include window manager, content provider, view system, phone manager, resource manager, notification manager, etc.
窗口管理器用于管理窗口程序。窗口管理器可以获取显示屏大小,判断是否有状态栏,锁定屏幕,截取屏幕等。A window manager is used to manage window programs. The window manager can obtain the display size, determine whether there is a status bar, lock the screen, capture the screen, etc.
内容提供器用来存放和获取数据,并使这些数据可以被应用程序访问。所述数据可以包括视频,图像,音频,拨打和接听的电话,浏览历史和书签,电话簿等。Content providers are used to store and retrieve data and make this data accessible to applications. Said data can include videos, images, audio, calls made and received, browsing history and bookmarks, phone books, etc.
视图系统包括可视控件,例如显示文字的控件,显示图片的控件等。视图系统可用于构建应用程序。显示界面可以由一个或多个视图组成的。例如,包括短信通知图标的显示界面,可以包括显示文字的视图以及显示图片的视图。The view system includes visual controls, such as controls that display text, controls that display pictures, etc. A view system can be used to build applications. The display interface can be composed of one or more views. For example, a display interface including a text message notification icon may include a view for displaying text and a view for displaying pictures.
电话管理器用于提供电子设备的通信功能。例如通话状态的管理(包括接通,挂断等)。Telephone managers are used to provide communication functions of electronic devices. For example, call status management (including connected, hung up, etc.).
资源管理器为应用程序提供各种资源,比如本地化字符串,图标,图片,布局文件,视频文件等等。The resource manager provides various resources to applications, such as localized strings, icons, pictures, layout files, video files, etc.
通知管理器使应用程序可以在状态栏中显示通知信息,可以用于传达告知类型的消息,可以短暂停留后自动消失,无需用户交互。比如通知管理器被用于告知下载完成,消息提醒等。通知管理器还可以是以图表或者滚动条文本形式出现在系统顶部状态栏的通知,例如后台运行的应用程序的通知,还可以是以对话窗口形式出现在屏幕上的通知。例如在状态栏提示文本信息,发出提示音,电子设备振动,指示灯闪烁等。The notification manager allows applications to display notification information in the status bar, which can be used to convey notification-type messages and can automatically disappear after a short stay without user interaction. For example, the notification manager is used to notify download completion, message reminders, etc. The notification manager can also be notifications that appear in the status bar at the top of the system in the form of charts or scroll bar text, such as notifications for applications running in the background, or notifications that appear on the screen in the form of conversation windows. For example, text information is prompted in the status bar, a beep sounds, the electronic device vibrates, the indicator light flashes, etc.
Android Runtime包括核心库和虚拟机。Android runtime负责安卓系统的调度和管理。Android Runtime includes core libraries and virtual machines. Android runtime is responsible for the scheduling and management of the Android system.
核心库包含两部分:一部分是java语言需要调用的功能函数,另一部分是安卓的核心库。The core library contains two parts: one is the functional functions that need to be called by the Java language, and the other is the core library of Android.
应用程序层和应用程序框架层运行在虚拟机中。虚拟机将应用程序层和应用程序框架层的java文件执行为二进制文件。虚拟机用于执行对象生命周期的管理,堆栈管理,线程管理,安全和异常的管理,以及垃圾回收等功能。The application layer and application framework layer run in virtual machines. The virtual machine executes the java files of the application layer and application framework layer into binary files. The virtual machine is used to perform object life cycle management, stack management, thread management, security and exception management, and garbage collection and other functions.
系统层可以包括多个功能模块。例如:表面管理器(surface manager),媒体库(Media Libraries),三维图形处理库(例如:OpenGL ES),2D图形引擎(例如:SGL)等。The system layer can include multiple functional modules. For example: surface manager (surface manager), media libraries (Media Libraries), 3D graphics processing libraries (for example: OpenGL ES), 2D graphics engines (for example: SGL), etc.
表面管理器用于对显示子系统进行管理,并且为多个应用程序提供了2D和3D图层的融合。The surface manager is used to manage the display subsystem and provides the fusion of 2D and 3D layers for multiple applications.
媒体库支持多种常用的音频,视频格式回放和录制,以及静态图像文件等。媒体库可以支持多种音视频编码格式,例如:MPEG4,H.264,MP3,AAC,AMR,JPG,PNG等。The media library supports playback and recording of a variety of commonly used audio and video formats, as well as static image files, etc. The media library can support a variety of audio and video encoding formats, such as: MPEG4, H.264, MP3, AAC, AMR, JPG, PNG, etc.
三维图形处理库用于实现三维图形绘图,图像渲染,合成和图层处理等。The 3D graphics processing library is used to implement 3D graphics drawing, image rendering, composition and layer processing.
2D图形引擎是2D绘图的绘图引擎。2D Graphics Engine is a drawing engine for 2D drawing.
内核层是硬件和软件之间的层。内核层至少包含显示驱动,摄像头驱动,音频驱动,传感器驱动。 The kernel layer is the layer between hardware and software. The kernel layer contains at least display driver, camera driver, audio driver, and sensor driver.
下面结合捕获拍照场景,示例性说明电子设备100软件以及硬件的工作流程。The following exemplifies the workflow of the software and hardware of the electronic device 100 in conjunction with capturing the photographing scene.
当触摸传感器180K接收到触摸操作,相应的硬件中断被发给内核层。内核层将触摸操作加工成原始输入事件(包括触摸坐标,触摸操作的时间戳等信息)。原始输入事件被存储在内核层。应用程序框架层从内核层获取原始输入事件,识别该输入事件所对应的控件。以该触摸操作是触摸单击操作,该单击操作所对应的控件为相机应用图标的控件为例,相机应用调用应用框架层的接口,启动相机应用,进而通过调用内核层启动摄像头驱动,通过摄像头193捕获静态图像或视频。When the touch sensor 180K receives a touch operation, the corresponding hardware interrupt is sent to the kernel layer. The kernel layer processes touch operations into raw input events (including touch coordinates, timestamps of touch operations, and other information). Raw input events are stored in the kernel layer. The application framework layer obtains the original input event from the kernel layer and identifies the control corresponding to the input event. Taking the touch operation as a touch click operation and the control corresponding to the click operation as a camera application icon control as an example, the camera application calls the interface of the application framework layer to start the camera application, and then starts the camera driver by calling the kernel layer. Camera 193 captures still images or video.
随着设备技术的不断发展,移动终端(如智能手机、智能平板等可随身携带的电子设备)的功能越来越强大,能够运行的应用类型也随之增加,用户可以在智能终端上安装不同的应用以满足日常生活以及工作过程中多方面的需求,例如在智能手机上安装修图软件,对图库里的图像进行美化以及拼接等处理,又例如在智能手机上对拍摄到的视频进行剪辑、添加背景音乐等,以满足随时随地编辑短视频的需求。然而,伴随着用户对于应用需求的不断增加,并且用户对于应用需求也朝着专业化以及复杂化的方向发展,如今基于移动终端开发的应用程序已经无法满足用户的使用需求,用户需要使用专业化程度较高的任务时,往往需要借助计算机电脑,例如在对以数字底片(RAW)格式封装的图像进行美化编辑时,则需要借助Lightroom应用进行处理,而Lightroom应用的图像编辑功能只开发了计算机电脑端,并没有适用于移动终端的应用程序,导致了用户无法在移动终端上完成对于RAW图像的编辑,大大增加了用户的操作难度。由此可见,基于移动终端的计算机电脑应用生态需快速完善,以满足现今用户对于应用的使用需求。With the continuous development of device technology, mobile terminals (such as smart phones, smart tablets and other portable electronic devices) are becoming more and more powerful, and the types of applications that can be run are also increasing. Users can install different types of applications on smart terminals. The application can meet various needs in daily life and work, such as installing photo editing software on smartphones, beautifying and splicing images in the gallery, and editing captured videos on smartphones. , add background music, etc. to meet the needs of editing short videos anytime and anywhere. However, as users' demands for applications continue to increase, and users' demands for applications are also developing in the direction of specialization and complexity, applications developed based on mobile terminals can no longer meet the needs of users, and users need to use specialized For higher-level tasks, it is often necessary to use a computer. For example, when beautifying and editing images packaged in digital negative (RAW) format, you need to use the Lightroom application for processing, and the image editing function of the Lightroom application has only been developed for computers. On the computer side, there is no application suitable for mobile terminals, resulting in users being unable to complete editing of RAW images on mobile terminals, which greatly increases the difficulty of user operations. It can be seen that the computer application ecosystem based on mobile terminals needs to be rapidly improved to meet the application needs of today's users.
虽然,可以通过为不同的电脑应用开发适用于移动终端的应用程序,以实现对上述应用生态进行扩展,但由于涉及的应用较多,且基于计算机电脑的应用功能较为复杂,因此采用上述方式需要耗费的工作量较大,若应用程序的开发商不开发适用于移动终端的应用,则会导致用户迟迟无法在移动终端上使用某一类型的应用。现有的解决方案是在移动终端上运行其他操作系统的模拟器,通过模拟器运行已在其他操作系统上开发的应用程序,从而无需重新针对移动终端开发对应的应用程序。Although it is possible to expand the above-mentioned application ecology by developing applications for mobile terminals for different computer applications, due to the large number of applications involved and the complexity of computer-based application functions, the above approach requires It takes a lot of work. If the application developer does not develop applications suitable for mobile terminals, it will cause users to be unable to use a certain type of application on mobile terminals. The existing solution is to run emulators of other operating systems on the mobile terminal, and use the emulator to run applications that have been developed on other operating systems, thereby eliminating the need to re-develop corresponding applications for the mobile terminal.
举例性地,移动终端的操作系统可以为安卓系统,在该情况下,可以在移动终端上通过模拟器运行Linux系统,以实现对移动终端的应用生态的扩展。鉴于当前Linux系统上已经有相对完善的计算机电脑的应用生态,且由于Linux操作系统与移动终端的操作系统(如安卓系统)均是基于容器结构搭建的,为在安卓系统上无差别的兼容运行Linux应用程序提供了实现的可能性。然而,由于Linux系统的模块与移动终端上的模块不一致,从而导致用户在对Linux系统进行操作方式(以键鼠为主)与在安卓系统上的操作方式(以触控为主)存在一定的差异,具体地,Linux系统主要以键鼠操作为主,触控操作为辅,而移动终端上主要以触控操作为主,以软键盘操作为辅,因此,移动终端上的部分触控操作对于Linux系统而言是无效的(即并不存在对应的触控手势),从而导致了用户在移动终端上运行基于Linux系统搭建的应用程序时,大量的触控操作无法被Linux系统识别,从而降低了用户的操作效率,需要重新适应Linux系统的操作习惯,大大增加了基于Linux系统搭建的应用程序所需的学习成本。For example, the operating system of the mobile terminal can be the Android system. In this case, the Linux system can be run on the mobile terminal through an emulator to expand the application ecosystem of the mobile terminal. In view of the fact that the current Linux system already has a relatively complete computer application ecosystem, and because the Linux operating system and the mobile terminal operating system (such as Android system) are both built based on the container structure, they are compatible and compatible with the Android system. Linux applications offer the possibility of implementation. However, because the modules of the Linux system are inconsistent with the modules on the mobile terminal, there is a certain difference between the way users operate the Linux system (mainly keyboard and mouse) and the way they operate the Android system (mainly touch). Difference, specifically, the Linux system is mainly based on keyboard and mouse operations, supplemented by touch operations, while the mobile terminal is mainly dominated by touch operations, supplemented by soft keyboard operations. Therefore, some touch operations on the mobile terminal It is invalid for the Linux system (that is, there is no corresponding touch gesture), which results in a large number of touch operations that cannot be recognized by the Linux system when users run applications based on the Linux system on mobile terminals. It reduces the user's operating efficiency and requires re-adaptation to the operating habits of the Linux system, which greatly increases the learning cost required for applications built based on the Linux system.
示例性地,图3示出了现有的安卓系统与Linux系统间可传输的触控操作的示意图。参见图3所示,移动终端上运行有安卓系统,该安卓系统内可以发起不同类型的触控操作,如对某一显示对象进行选择的点击选择操作、针对移动终端显示屏幕边缘发起的手势操作又或者在点击可编辑区域时自动唤起软键盘的文本输入操作等,而现有的在安卓系统内运行Linux系统的模拟技术,无法识别安卓系统内的触控操作。当然,在安卓系统上运行windows系统时同样也存在上述触控操作无法被识别的问题。Exemplarily, FIG. 3 shows a schematic diagram of touch operations that can be transmitted between the existing Android system and the Linux system. As shown in Figure 3, the mobile terminal runs an Android system, and different types of touch operations can be initiated in the Android system, such as a click selection operation to select a certain display object, and a gesture operation initiated against the edge of the mobile terminal display screen. Or when clicking on the editable area, the text input operation of the soft keyboard is automatically evoked. However, the existing simulation technology of running the Linux system in the Android system cannot recognize the touch operation in the Android system. Of course, when running the Windows system on the Android system, there is also the problem that the above touch operations cannot be recognized.
由此可见,跨系统间的触控操作存在传输壁垒,触控操作无法映射至另一操作系统内,即在原生的操作系统内原本能够被识别的触控操作无法被模拟运行的另一操作系统识别,降低了在进行跨系统的应用操作时的准确性以及灵活性,继而降低了用户的操作效率,用户的使用体验较差。It can be seen that there are transmission barriers for touch operations across systems. Touch operations cannot be mapped to another operating system. That is, a touch operation that can be recognized in the native operating system cannot be simulated to run another operation. System identification reduces the accuracy and flexibility of cross-system application operations, thereby reducing the user's operating efficiency and providing a poor user experience.
实施例一: Example 1:
因此,为了解决现有的设备控制技术,对跨系统运行的应用程序进行操作时,在原本操作系统内能够被识别的触控操作无法被基于另一操作系统搭建的应用程序识别,从而用户的操作效率较低,用户使用体验较差的问题,本申请提供了一种触控输入的方法,该触控输入的方法的执行主体以一电子设备,该电子设备包括但不限于:智能手机、平板电脑、智能手表、计算机电脑、手提电脑等能够接收用户发起的触控操作的电子设备。为了便于描述,以下实施例中上述电子设备以智能平板为例进行说明,若该电子设备为智能手机或其他电子设备,实现方式与智能平板的实现方式完全相同,可以参考智能平板的具体实现过程。Therefore, in order to solve the problem of existing device control technology, when operating applications running across systems, the touch operations that can be recognized in the original operating system cannot be recognized by the application built based on another operating system. As a result, the user's To solve the problems of low operating efficiency and poor user experience, this application provides a touch input method. The touch input method is executed by an electronic device. The electronic device includes but is not limited to: a smart phone, Tablets, smart watches, computers, laptops and other electronic devices that can receive touch operations initiated by users. For ease of description, in the following embodiments, the electronic device is described using a smart tablet as an example. If the electronic device is a smartphone or other electronic device, the implementation method is exactly the same as that of the smart tablet. You may refer to the specific implementation process of the smart tablet. .
该智能平板配置有触控屏,能够通过触控屏接收用户发起的触控操作,并通过内置的第一触控模块实现对于接收到的触控操作的转换以及传输,以使基于另一操作系统搭建的预设应用进行识别并执行对应的响应操作。The smart tablet is equipped with a touch screen, can receive touch operations initiated by the user through the touch screen, and realize conversion and transmission of the received touch operations through the built-in first touch module, so that based on another operation The preset application built by the system identifies and performs corresponding response operations.
示例性地,图4示出了本申请一实施例提供的智能平板的结构示意图。参见图4所示,该实施例提供的智能平板至少包含以下层级:应用层、应用框架层、系统层、硬件抽象层、内核层以及物理层。Exemplarily, FIG. 4 shows a schematic structural diagram of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG. 4 , the smart tablet provided by this embodiment includes at least the following layers: application layer, application framework layer, system layer, hardware abstraction layer, kernel layer and physical layer.
上述应用层具体用于运行各个应用程序,包括系统内置的应用程序(如系统设置)以及自定义安装的应用程序。其中,上述应用层内包含一代理应用,该代理应用用于实现第一操作系统(即智能平板的原生操作系统)与第二操作系统(即模拟运行的另一操作系统)间的数据交互,例如基于第二操作系统搭建的预设应用可以通过上述代理应用进行传输,上述跨系统间的应用数据传输过程具体包括:通过支持可显示的X11协议的应用以及wayland协议的应用,将窗口、显示数据等相关信息通过第二操作系统(如Linux系统)内的显示模块处理后,显示数据传输给上述代理应用,然后通过代理应用调用第一操作系统(如安卓系统)内的应用框架层内的相关模块完成显示,从而能够在第一操作系统内生成跨系统应用的应用窗口以及显示窗口内图像的能力。The above-mentioned application layer is specifically used to run various applications, including system-built-in applications (such as system settings) and custom-installed applications. Among them, the above-mentioned application layer includes a proxy application, which is used to realize data interaction between the first operating system (i.e., the native operating system of the smart tablet) and the second operating system (i.e., another operating system running in simulation), For example, a preset application built based on the second operating system can be transmitted through the above-mentioned proxy application. The above-mentioned cross-system application data transmission process specifically includes: through applications that support the displayable X11 protocol and wayland protocol, the window, display After data and other related information are processed by the display module in the second operating system (such as Linux system), the display data is transmitted to the above-mentioned proxy application, and then the proxy application calls the application framework layer in the first operating system (such as Android system). The relevant module completes the display, thereby being able to generate an application window for cross-system applications within the first operating system and the ability to display images in the window.
该代理应用具体负责对跨系统运行的应用程序的界面显示、窗口管理以及应用启动等相关功能,具体包含以下模块:主执行模块、应用执行模块、服务模块。其中,主执行模块负责生成桌面内基于跨系统的应用程序的桌面图标,如Linux的桌面图标。示例性地,图5示出了本申请一实施例提供的智能平板的桌面应用的示意图。参见图5所示,该智能平板的桌面内显示有所有可以执行的应用程序,如图库应用51、备忘录应用52等,还显示有基于其他操作系统搭建的应用程序,如文档编辑应用53,该文档编辑应用53的图标生成即可以是通过上述代理应用内的主执行模块生成的。可选地,为了区分跨系统应用与基于原本操作系统的应用,在上述跨系统应用的应用图标的左下角可以配置有一标记,即标记54,从而能够方便用于区分基于不同操作系统搭建的应用。应用执行模块具体用于生成基于第二操作系统搭建的应用程序的窗口界面;而服务模块具体用于对上述生成的窗口界面进行管理以及图像显示等。The agent application is specifically responsible for interface display, window management, application startup and other related functions of applications running across systems, and specifically includes the following modules: main execution module, application execution module, and service module. Among them, the main execution module is responsible for generating desktop icons based on cross-system applications in the desktop, such as Linux desktop icons. Exemplarily, FIG. 5 shows a schematic diagram of a desktop application of a smart tablet provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 5, the desktop of the smart tablet displays all executable applications, such as library application 51, memo application 52, etc., and also displays applications based on other operating systems, such as document editing application 53. The icon generation of the document editing application 53 can be generated through the main execution module in the above-mentioned proxy application. Optionally, in order to distinguish cross-system applications from applications based on the original operating system, a mark, namely mark 54, can be configured in the lower left corner of the application icon of the above-mentioned cross-system application, so that it can be conveniently used to distinguish applications based on different operating systems. . The application execution module is specifically used to generate a window interface of an application program built based on the second operating system; and the service module is specifically used to manage and display images of the above-generated window interface.
上述应用框架层中包含有智能平板内基础功能的应用框架,即框架1,以及实现扩展功能的扩展框架,即框架2。上述原生的应用框架中包含有不同的系统模块,如无线通信模块、蓝牙通信模块、多媒体播放模块等。而扩展框架内可以配置多窗口显示模块,以实现不同应用的应用窗口同时在智能平板的同一界面内显示;该扩展框架还包含第一触控模块,该第一触控模块具体用于实现跨系统间的触控操作的识别以及响应。The above-mentioned application framework layer includes an application framework for basic functions in the smart tablet, namely Framework 1, and an extension framework for implementing extended functions, namely Framework 2. The above-mentioned native application framework contains different system modules, such as wireless communication module, Bluetooth communication module, multimedia playback module, etc. A multi-window display module can be configured in the extension frame to enable application windows of different applications to be displayed in the same interface of the smart tablet at the same time; the extension frame also includes a first touch module, which is specifically used to realize cross-platform display. Recognition and response of touch operations between systems.
与此同时,第二操作系统可以通过镜像容器运行,即在镜像容器内搭建基于第二操作系统,该模拟的操作系统同样包含有应用层、应用框架层以及系统层等。需要说明的是,上述运行有第二操作系统的镜像容器可以部署于云端服务器内,也可以部署于智能平板本地。At the same time, the second operating system can be run through the image container, that is, the second operating system is built in the image container. The simulated operating system also includes an application layer, an application framework layer, and a system layer. It should be noted that the above-mentioned image container running the second operating system can be deployed in the cloud server or locally on the smart tablet.
示例性地,图6示出了本申请一实施例提供的跨系统的数据传输的示意图。参见图6中的(a)所示,该运行有第二操作系统的镜像容器部署于智能平板,在该情况下,上述镜像容器与智能平板的第一操作系统共用智能平板中的内核层以及物理层,并通过代理应用完成上述两个操作系统间的数据传输,即在该情况下,第一操作系统与第二操作系统均搭载于同一电子设备内。参见图6中的(b)所示,该运行有第二操作系统的镜像容器部署于云端服务器,即第一操作系统与第二操作系统分别搭载于不同的电子设备内,在该情况下,在实现跨系统间的数据传输时,可以通过第一操作系统中的代理应用生成所需发送的数据,并通过智能平板内的物理层发送给云端服务器,以被云端服务地内的镜像容器接收;对应地,镜像容器内生成的数据也可以通过云端服务器发送 给智能平板,并被智能平板内的物理层接收并依此传递给智能平板内的代理应用,从而实现了跨系统间的数据传输。Exemplarily, FIG. 6 shows a schematic diagram of cross-system data transmission provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to (a) in Figure 6, the image container running the second operating system is deployed on the smart tablet. In this case, the above-mentioned image container and the first operating system of the smart tablet share the kernel layer in the smart tablet and The physical layer is used to complete the data transmission between the two operating systems through the proxy application. That is, in this case, the first operating system and the second operating system are both installed in the same electronic device. Referring to (b) in Figure 6, the image container running the second operating system is deployed on the cloud server, that is, the first operating system and the second operating system are respectively installed in different electronic devices. In this case, When realizing cross-system data transmission, the required data can be generated through the proxy application in the first operating system and sent to the cloud server through the physical layer in the smart tablet to be received by the mirror container in the cloud service location; Correspondingly, the data generated in the image container can also be sent through the cloud server. to the smart tablet, and is received by the physical layer in the smart tablet and passed to the agent application in the smart tablet, thus realizing cross-system data transmission.
其中,运行有第二操作系统的镜像容器的应用框架层配置有第二触控模块,该第二触控模块可以接收第一触控模块发送的信息,并将其转换为能够被基于第二操作系统搭建的应用程序识别的操作指令;该镜像容器内的应用层运行有基于第二操作系统搭建的应用程序,即后续的预设应用,相关的操作窗口可以通过代理应用于第一操作系统内显示,以实现了跨系统间的应用操作,实现了对智能平板内的应用生态的扩展。Wherein, the application framework layer of the image container running the second operating system is configured with a second touch module. The second touch module can receive the information sent by the first touch module and convert it into information that can be processed based on the second touch module. Operation instructions identified by applications built by the operating system; the application layer in the image container runs applications built based on the second operating system, that is, subsequent default applications, and the relevant operation windows can be applied to the first operating system through a proxy Internal display enables cross-system application operations and expands the application ecosystem within the smart tablet.
具体地,基于上述的智能平板的结构,以下具体描述本申请实施例提供的触控输入方法的具体实现过程。图7示出了本申请一实施例提供的触控输入的方法的实现流程图,详述如下:Specifically, based on the structure of the smart tablet mentioned above, the specific implementation process of the touch input method provided by the embodiments of the present application is described in detail below. Figure 7 shows an implementation flow chart of a touch input method provided by an embodiment of the present application. The details are as follows:
在S701中,第一操作系统接收用户对预设应用的触控操作;所述预设应用是基于所述第二操作系统搭建的;In S701, the first operating system receives the user's touch operation on the preset application; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
在S702中,第一操作系统响应于触控操作,通过第一操作系统内的第一触控模块将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统。In S702, in response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends the touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system through the first touch module in the first operating system.
在本实施例中,智能平板是基于第一操作系统搭建的,即第一操作系统具体为智能平板的原生操作系统,在一种可能的实现方式中,上述第一操作系统具体为安卓操作系统、鸿蒙操作系统、Linux操作系统或windows操作系统中的任一一种,当然,该第一操作系统还可以为支持触控操作的其他操作系统,在此不对第一操作系统进行限定。In this embodiment, the smart tablet is built based on the first operating system, that is, the first operating system is specifically the native operating system of the smart tablet. In a possible implementation, the first operating system is specifically the Android operating system. , Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system. Of course, the first operating system can also be other operating systems that support touch operations, and the first operating system is not limited here.
在本实施例中,智能平板内显示有基于其他操作系统(即第二操作系统)搭建的预设应用对应的应用图标,用户可以通过点击上述应用图标以启动上述的预设应用。继续以图5为了进行说明,上述文档编辑应用53即是一基于Linux系统搭建的应用程序(即上述的预设应用),用户可以通过点击上述文档编辑应用53以启动预设应用。智能平板在检测到用户需要启动跨系统运行的预设应用后,可以生成该预设应用对应的操作界面,用户可以在该操作界面内发起对于预设应用的触控操作。In this embodiment, the smart tablet displays application icons corresponding to the default applications built based on other operating systems (ie, the second operating system). The user can click the application icons to start the above-mentioned default applications. Continuing to illustrate with FIG. 5 , the above-mentioned document editing application 53 is an application built based on the Linux system (ie, the above-mentioned default application). The user can click the above-mentioned document editing application 53 to start the default application. After detecting that the user needs to launch a preset application that runs across the system, the smart tablet can generate an operation interface corresponding to the preset application, and the user can initiate a touch operation on the preset application in the operation interface.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,图8示出了本申请一实施例提供的运行预设应用的具体实现流程图。参见图8所示,与图7所示的实施例相比,本申请实施例在S701之前还包括S801~S804,具体描述如下:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, FIG. 8 shows a specific implementation flow chart of running a preset application provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 8, compared with the embodiment shown in Figure 7, the embodiment of the present application also includes S801~S804 before S701. The specific description is as follows:
在S801中,第一操作系统接收用户发起对于所述预设应用的启动操作。In S801, the first operating system receives a user-initiated startup operation for the preset application.
在本实施例中,智能平板内安装有不同类型的应用程序,其中包含有基于另一操作系统搭建的预设应用。如上所述,该智能平板的应用层内运行有代理应用,通过该代理应用的主执行模块可以在智能平板的桌面内生成预设应用的应用图标,如图5中的文档编辑应用53,在智能平板检测到用户点击上述的文档编辑应用53时,则识别用户发起了上述的启动操作。In this embodiment, different types of applications are installed in the smart tablet, including default applications built based on another operating system. As mentioned above, there is a proxy application running in the application layer of the smart tablet. The main execution module of the proxy application can generate the application icon of the preset application in the desktop of the smart tablet, such as the document editing application 53 in Figure 5. When the smart tablet detects that the user clicks on the above-mentioned document editing application 53, it recognizes that the user initiated the above-mentioned startup operation.
在S802中,第一操作系统通过安装于所述第一操作系统中的代理应用向第二操作系统发送应用启动指令;所述应用启动指令携带有所述预设应用的应用标识。In S802, the first operating system sends an application startup instruction to the second operating system through the proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the default application.
在本实施例中,智能平板的第一操作系统内安装有代理应用,在接收到对于预设应用的启动指令后,可以通过代理应用向安装有第二操作系统的容器发送关于预设应用的启动指令,以使在第二操作系统的容器内运行上述预设应用。需要说明的是,若该容器配置于智能平板内,则代理应用可以通过公用的内核层将上述的启动指令发送给上述运行有第二操作系统的容器;若该容器配置于除智能平板外的其他设备(如云端服务器),则生成携带有云端服务器的通信地址的通信数据包,并通过与云端服务器之间的建立的通信链路发送给云端服务器,以通知云端服务器运行上述的预设应用。In this embodiment, a proxy application is installed in the first operating system of the smart tablet. After receiving the startup instruction for the default application, the proxy application can send information about the default application to the container where the second operating system is installed. Start the instruction to run the above-mentioned preset application in the container of the second operating system. It should be noted that if the container is configured in a smart tablet, the agent application can send the above-mentioned startup command to the above-mentioned container running the second operating system through the common kernel layer; if the container is configured in a device other than the smart tablet, Other devices (such as cloud servers) generate communication data packets carrying the communication address of the cloud server and send them to the cloud server through the established communication link with the cloud server to notify the cloud server to run the above-mentioned preset application. .
在本实施例中,上述代理应用发送得启动指令中携带有所需启动得预设应用的应用标识,该应用标识可以为该预设应用的应用名称(例如Ligtroom、PhotoshopCS4等),也可以为该预设应用的应用编号(例如LR10245,PS23568等),运行有第二操作系统的容器在接收到给启动应用后,可以提取其中包含的应用标识,并与本地的各个已有应用的应用标识进行匹配,并将与启动指令中关联的应用标识对应的已有应用识别为上述的预设应用。In this embodiment, the startup command sent by the proxy application carries the application identifier of the default application that needs to be started. The application identifier can be the application name of the default application (such as Ligtroom, Photoshop CS4, etc.), or it can be After receiving the application number of the preset application (such as LR10245, PS23568, etc.), the container running the second operating system can extract the application ID contained in it and compare it with the application ID of each existing local application. Matching is performed, and the existing application corresponding to the application identifier associated with the startup instruction is identified as the above-mentioned default application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述应用标识还可以为在第一操作系统内的坐标信息,由于预设应用在第一操作系统内的应用图标是通过代理应用生成的,因此,代理应用已经建立了应用图标 与第二操作系统内关联的预设应用之间的关联关系,该关联关系可以记录有预设应用在第一操作系统内的图标位置。在该情况下,上述启动指令中可以携带有用户点击的坐标信息,并将该坐标信息与运行第二操作系统的容器中记录的上述关联关系内的图标位置进行匹配,将与点击的坐标位置匹配的图标位置关联的应用识别为上述的预设应用。In a possible implementation, the above-mentioned application identification can also be coordinate information in the first operating system. Since the application icon of the default application in the first operating system is generated by the proxy application, the proxy application has Created application icon The association relationship with the default application associated in the second operating system, the association relationship may record the icon position of the default application in the first operating system. In this case, the above-mentioned startup command may carry the coordinate information clicked by the user, and match the coordinate information with the icon position in the above-mentioned association recorded in the container running the second operating system, and match the clicked coordinate position with the icon position recorded in the container running the second operating system. The application associated with the matching icon position is identified as the above-mentioned default application.
在S803中,第二操作系统响应所述应用启动指令,运行所述预设应用,并将所述预设应用的操作界面反馈给所述代理应用。In S803, the second operating system responds to the application startup instruction, runs the preset application, and feeds back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application.
在本实施例中,运行有第二操作系统的容器在生成关于预设应用的启动指令后,可以获取该预设应用对应的应用数据包,并通过该应用数据包以在容器内启动上述的预设应用,通过容器中的应用框架层实现对于预设应用的操作界面的渲染,并将该操作界面反馈给代理应用,以实现跨系统的操作界面的显示。In this embodiment, after the container running the second operating system generates a startup instruction for the default application, it can obtain the application data package corresponding to the default application, and use the application data package to start the above-mentioned steps in the container. The preset application renders the operation interface of the preset application through the application framework layer in the container, and feeds the operation interface back to the proxy application to realize the display of the cross-system operation interface.
在一种可能的实现方式中,运行有第二操作系统的容器可以将操作界面转换为对应的界面图像,并将该界面图像发送给代理应用,即在第一操作系统内生成的关于预设应用的操作界面,具体是以图像格式显示的。In a possible implementation, the container running the second operating system can convert the operation interface into a corresponding interface image, and send the interface image to the proxy application, that is, the preset generated within the first operating system. The operation interface of the application is specifically displayed in image format.
在S804中,第一操作系统通过所述代理应用在所述第一操作系统内生成所述操作界面。In S804, the first operating system generates the operation interface in the first operating system through the proxy application.
在本实施例中,运行于第一操作系统内的代理应用在接收到运行有第二操作系统的容器反馈的操作界面后,可以在智能平板的第一操作系统内进行渲染,从而得到用户可以发起触控操作的操作界面。In this embodiment, after receiving the operation interface fed back by the container running the second operating system, the agent application running in the first operating system can render it in the first operating system of the smart tablet, so that the user can The operation interface for initiating touch operations.
示例性地,图9示出了本申请一实施例提供的操作界面的示意图。参见图9中的(a)所示,该操作界面具体为一全屏显示的操作界面,该操作界面是基于运行有第二操作系统的容器内运行的预设应用生成的,并通过代理应用在第一操作系统内进行渲染,具体地,该操作界面具体可以为一图像数据,即上述包含的各个可操作的控件在该操作界面内并没有对应的交互接口,而是需要通过代理应用反馈给容器内运行的预设应用,才能够对上述交互操作进行相应。Exemplarily, FIG. 9 shows a schematic diagram of an operation interface provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to (a) in Figure 9, the operation interface is specifically a full-screen operation interface. The operation interface is generated based on a preset application running in a container running a second operating system, and is generated through a proxy application. Rendering is performed in the first operating system. Specifically, the operation interface can be an image data, that is, each of the above-mentioned operable controls does not have a corresponding interactive interface in the operation interface, but needs to be fed back to the operation interface through a proxy application. Only the preset application running in the container can respond to the above interactive operations.
参见图9中的(b)所示,该操作界面还可以为一非全屏显示的操作界面,如通过悬浮窗口的方式显示操作界面。具体采用何种方式显示操作界面,根据具体的预设应用进行确定,在此不作限定。As shown in (b) of FIG. 9 , the operation interface may also be a non-full-screen display operation interface, such as displaying the operation interface in a floating window. The specific method used to display the operation interface will be determined according to the specific preset application and is not limited here.
在本申请实施例中,通过代理应用实现跨系统间的数据传输,并通过代理应用接收通过容器运行的预设应用反馈的操作界面,实现了跨系统的操作界面的显示,为后续用户在第一操作系统内发起对于跨系统应用的触控操作提供的实现基础,并且上述操作界面的显示过程与一般应用的操作界面的显示效果是一致的,从而上述跨系统的应用启动对于用户而言是无感的,大大提高了用户操作的一致性,继而提高了用户的使用体验。In the embodiment of the present application, cross-system data transmission is realized through the proxy application, and the operation interface of the preset application feedback running through the container is received through the proxy application, thereby realizing the display of the cross-system operation interface and providing convenience for subsequent users in the third application. Initiating a touch operation for cross-system applications within an operating system provides a basis for implementation, and the display process of the above-mentioned operation interface is consistent with the display effect of the operation interface of general applications, so that the above-mentioned cross-system application startup is convenient for users. It is non-perceptual and greatly improves the consistency of user operations, thereby improving the user experience.
在本实施例中,智能平板配置有触控模块,用户可以在触控模块内发起触控操作,上述触控操作包括有点击选择类型的触控操作,以及除点击选择类型的其他触控操作,如边缘手势类型的触控操作、多触点的触控操作以及通过软键盘对可编辑区域输入字符的操作。In this embodiment, the smart tablet is equipped with a touch module, and the user can initiate touch operations in the touch module. The above touch operations include touch operations of the click selection type, and other touch operations except the click selection type. , such as edge gesture type touch operations, multi-touch touch operations, and character input operations in the editable area through the soft keyboard.
示例性地,图10示出了本申请实施例提供的不同触控操作的示意图。Exemplarily, FIG. 10 shows a schematic diagram of different touch operations provided by embodiments of the present application.
1.点击选择类型的触控操作。参见图10中的(a)所示,用户可以通过点击的方式选择应用程序内操作窗口的显示对象,如操作界面内的虚拟按钮以及打开子界面等,例如用户通过点击的方式选择操作窗口中的开始控件101,以开始控件101对应的菜单栏102。1. Click to select the type of touch operation. Referring to (a) in Figure 10, the user can click to select the display object of the operation window in the application, such as the virtual button in the operation interface and open the sub-interface. For example, the user can click to select the display object in the operation window. Start control 101 to start the menu bar 102 corresponding to control 101.
2.边缘手势类型的触控操作。智能平板记录有多种智能手势,从而能够方便对于智能平板进行操作,以提高用户对于智能平板的操作效率。举例性地,如图10中的(b)所示,用户可以通过从智能平板屏幕的左侧边缘为起点发起一滑动操作,该从边缘为起点的滑动操作对应的操作指令为“返回”,或者“关闭当前操作窗口”等,具体可以根据实际情况对应不同的操作指令,通过发起与预设记录规则相同的手势,以实现对应用程序进行操作,无需点击操作窗口中对应的控件,提高了用户操作的灵活性。2. Edge gesture type touch operation. The smart tablet records a variety of smart gestures, which can facilitate the operation of the smart tablet and improve the user's operating efficiency of the smart tablet. For example, as shown in (b) of Figure 10, the user can initiate a sliding operation from the left edge of the smart tablet screen as the starting point, and the corresponding operation command of the sliding operation starting from the edge is "return". Or "Close the current operation window", etc. You can respond to different operation instructions according to the actual situation. By initiating the same gesture as the preset recording rule, you can operate the application without clicking the corresponding control in the operation window, which improves Flexibility of user operations.
3.多触点的触控操作。智能平板的触控模块支持多点触控,如图10中的(c)所示,用户可以通过双指触控的方式对应用程序内的显示对象进行放大以及缩小。3. Multi-touch touch operation. The touch module of the smart tablet supports multi-touch, as shown in (c) in Figure 10. The user can zoom in and out of the display objects in the application through two-finger touch.
4.通过软键盘对可编辑区域输入字符的操作。由于智能平板一般没有配置有外设的输入设备, 如键盘或者遥控器等,在进行字符输入时需要显示软键盘的方式实现输入。因此,智能平板可以根据用户点击区域的类型不同,确定是否需要唤起软键盘,如图10中的(d)所示,在用户点击可编辑区域时,如对话页面中的内容输入区域,则会开启软键盘,用户可以通过软键盘完成字符输入。4. Input characters into the editable area through the soft keyboard. Since smart tablets generally do not have peripheral input devices, For example, a keyboard or remote control needs to display a soft keyboard when inputting characters. Therefore, the smart tablet can determine whether the soft keyboard needs to be evoked based on the type of area that the user clicks. As shown in (d) in Figure 10, when the user clicks on an editable area, such as the content input area on the conversation page, it will Turn on the soft keyboard, and users can complete character input through the soft keyboard.
由此可见,智能平板中能够发起的触控操作往往是于智能平板的操作系统以及平板的操作特性相关的,而部分的触控操作在其他操作系统中并无法直接进行映射,例如上述的边缘手势类型的触控操作,对于基于Linux系统搭建的设备以及基于windows系统搭建的设备则不适用,由于上述两个操作系统的设备一般是通过键鼠方式进行控制,往往没有配置对应的触控屏,也当然不存在边缘触控类型的操作。基于此,为了实现不同操作系统间的触控操作的互通互识,第一操作系统内配置有第一触控模块,在智能平板接收到用户对基于跨系统运行的预设应用发起的触控操作时,可以将该触控操作交由第一触控模块进行处理,生成对应的触控事件。It can be seen that the touch operations that can be initiated in a smart tablet are often related to the operating system of the smart tablet and the operating characteristics of the tablet, and some touch operations cannot be directly mapped in other operating systems, such as the above-mentioned edge Gesture-type touch operations are not applicable to devices built on Linux systems and devices built on Windows systems. Since the devices of the above two operating systems are generally controlled by keyboard and mouse, they often do not have corresponding touch screens. , and of course there is no edge touch type operation. Based on this, in order to achieve interoperability and mutual understanding of touch operations between different operating systems, a first touch module is configured in the first operating system, and the smart tablet receives a touch initiated by the user based on a preset application running across the system. During operation, the touch operation can be handed over to the first touch module for processing to generate a corresponding touch event.
在S703中,第二操作系统通过第二触控模块生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令。In S703, the second operating system generates an operation instruction corresponding to the touch event through the second touch module.
在本实施例中,智能平板中的第一触控模块在生成触控事件后,可以将该触控事件传输给运行有第二操作系统的镜像容器中配置的第二触控模块,第二触控模块具体是用于对在第一操作系统内生成的触控事件进行识别,并转换为能够被第二操作系统识别的操作指令。In this embodiment, after generating a touch event, the first touch module in the smart tablet can transmit the touch event to the second touch module configured in the image container running the second operating system. The touch module is specifically used to identify touch events generated in the first operating system and convert them into operation instructions that can be recognized by the second operating system.
在本实施例中,智能平板配置有代理应用,当设置于应用框架层内的第一触控模块生成得到触控事件后,可以将该触控事件传输给位于应用层内的代理应用,通过代理应用将上述的触控事件传输给容器内的第二触控模块。In this embodiment, the smart tablet is configured with a proxy application. When the first touch module arranged in the application framework layer generates a touch event, the touch event can be transmitted to the proxy application located in the application layer. The proxy application transmits the above touch event to the second touch module in the container.
在S704中,第二操作系统通过所述预设应用执行操作指令。In S704, the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
在本实施例中,由于上述第二触控模块生成的操作指令是能够被第二操作系统识别的指令,因此基于第二操作系统搭建的预设应用也能够对上述操作指令进行响应,并在生成对应响应结果,例如返回上一级界面、关闭预设应用、调整显示内容等,具体响应结果可以根据发起的触控操作确定,在此不做限定。In this embodiment, since the operation instructions generated by the second touch module are instructions that can be recognized by the second operating system, the default application built based on the second operating system can also respond to the operation instructions and execute the operation instructions in the second operating system. Generate corresponding response results, such as returning to the previous level interface, closing the default application, adjusting the display content, etc. The specific response results can be determined according to the initiated touch operation, and are not limited here.
以上可以看出,本申请实施例提供的一种触控输入的方法可以通过在第一操作系统中运行跨操作系统的预设应用,在用户在第一操作系统发起对于预设应用的触控操作时,可以通过第一操作系统的第一触控模块生成对应的触控事件,并传输第二操作系统,通过第二操作系统中的第二触控模块对触控事件进行转换,生成能够被第二操作系统识别的操作指令,从而运行于第二操作系统内的预设应用执行操作指令生成与之对应的响应结果,实现了对跨系统间的触控操作的互通。与现有的设备控制技术相比,本申请实施例中通过在不同的操作系统内配置对应的触控模块,通过触控模块对触控操作进行跨系统的转换,从而能够生成支持跨系统运行的预设应用识别的操作指令,提高了跨系统操作的一致性,从而提高了对于操作系统内的应用生态的扩展,满足了用户的使用需求。It can be seen from the above that the touch input method provided by the embodiment of the present application can run a preset application across operating systems in the first operating system, and the user initiates a touch control for the preset application in the first operating system. During operation, the corresponding touch event can be generated through the first touch module of the first operating system and transmitted to the second operating system, and the touch event can be converted through the second touch module in the second operating system to generate a The operation instructions recognized by the second operating system allow the preset application running in the second operating system to execute the operation instructions and generate corresponding response results, thereby realizing interoperability of touch operations across systems. Compared with the existing device control technology, in the embodiments of the present application, corresponding touch modules are configured in different operating systems, and the touch operations are converted across systems through the touch modules, so that it is possible to generate a system that supports cross-system operation. The preset application-identified operation instructions improve the consistency of cross-system operations, thereby improving the expansion of the application ecosystem within the operating system and meeting the user needs.
实施例二:Example 2:
其中,针对不同类型的触控操作,第一触控模块与第二触控模块在实现触控操作转换为对应的操作指令时,具体的处理流程以及调用模块内的单元等方面均存在一定的差异。示例性地,图11示出了本申请一实施例提供的对于不同类型的触控操作转换为操作指令的数据流图。参见图11所示,上述第一触控模块内包含有多个不同的子单元,对应地第二触控模块内同样包含有不同的子单元,不同的子单元用于实现不同类型的触控操作的转化。上述数据流图具体包含有三个数据流,分别为针对边缘手势类型的第一触控操作的数据流1,针对多触点类型的第二触控操作的数据流2,以及对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作的数据流3。具体的实现过程描述如下:Among them, for different types of touch operations, when the first touch module and the second touch module convert the touch operations into corresponding operation instructions, there are certain differences in the specific processing procedures and the calling of units in the modules. difference. Exemplarily, FIG. 11 shows a data flow diagram for converting different types of touch operations into operation instructions provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 11, the above-mentioned first touch module contains a plurality of different sub-units, and correspondingly the second touch module also contains different sub-units, and different sub-units are used to implement different types of touch. Operational transformation. The above data flow diagram specifically includes three data flows, namely data flow 1 for the first touch operation of the edge gesture type, data flow 2 for the second touch operation of the multi-touch type, and data flow 2 for the preset application. Data stream 3 for the third touch operation of clicking on any area. The specific implementation process is described as follows:
类型1:针对边缘手势类型的第一触控操作。Type 1: First touch operation for edge gesture type.
参见图12所示,图12示出了本申请一实施例对于边缘手势类型的触控输入的方法的实现流程图。参见图12所示,与图7所示的实施例相比,本申请实施例提供的触控输入的方法中,S702具体为S1201,S703具体为S1202,S704具体为S1203,具体描述如下:Referring to FIG. 12 , FIG. 12 shows an implementation flow chart of a method for edge gesture type touch input according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 12, compared with the embodiment shown in Figure 7, in the touch input method provided by the embodiment of the present application, S702 is specifically S1201, S703 is specifically S1202, and S704 is specifically S1203. The specific description is as follows:
在S1201中,通过所述第一触控模块确定目标窗口的窗口类型,并根据所述窗口类型生成所述第一触控操作对应的第一触控事件;所述目标窗口为所述第一触控操作在所述预设应用中操作 的窗口;所述第一触控事件包括:所述目标窗口的窗口类型以及所述第一触控操作对应的操作类型。In S1201, the first touch module determines the window type of the target window, and generates a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first Touch operation operates in the preset application window; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation.
在本实施例中,在智能平板内发起的边缘手势具体用于对前台运行的应用程序的操作窗口整体进行操作,例如进行界面返回或者退出应用程序等。In this embodiment, the edge gesture initiated in the smart tablet is specifically used to operate the entire operation window of the application running in the foreground, such as returning to the interface or exiting the application.
在本实施例,上述操作类型具体指的是边缘手势对应何种操作,上述操作类型包括但不限于:关闭窗口、退出应用或进行应用管理等不同类型的操作,具体可以根据用户实际情况进行设置,在此不再进行限定。In this embodiment, the above-mentioned operation types specifically refer to the operations corresponding to edge gestures. The above-mentioned operation types include but are not limited to: closing windows, exiting applications, or performing application management and other different types of operations. The specific operations can be set according to the actual situation of the user. , which is no longer limited here.
示例性地,图13示出了本申请一实施例提供的多种边缘手势的示意图。参见图13中的(a)所示,用户可以从智能平板的屏幕右侧边缘开始滑动,生成一个从右到左方向的滑动指令,与在屏幕内发起的左滑指令不同,上述滑动指令是以屏幕右侧边缘为起点的,因此智能平板会识别该滑动指令为边缘手势的触控操作,并查询该触控操作关联的操作指令,在该例子中,上述右侧边缘的左滑触控操作对应的为“退出”的操作指令。参见图13中的(b)所示,用户可以从智能平板的屏幕下方边缘开始滑动,生成一个从下至上方向的滑动指令,与在屏幕内发起的上滑指令不同,上述滑动指令是以屏幕下方边缘为起点的,因此智能平板会识别该滑动指令为进行应用窗口管理,如图13中的(c)所示,用户可以通过该应用窗口管理关闭相应的应用程序,或者切换至其他应用程序进行操作。当然,上述边缘手势所对应的操作指令可以根据实际情况进行设置,在此不对边缘手势所对应的操作指令进行限定。Exemplarily, FIG. 13 shows a schematic diagram of multiple edge gestures provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to (a) in Figure 13, the user can start sliding from the right edge of the smart tablet screen to generate a sliding instruction from right to left. Different from the left sliding instruction initiated within the screen, the above sliding instruction is Starting from the right edge of the screen, the smart tablet will recognize the sliding command as an edge gesture touch operation and query the operation command associated with the touch operation. In this example, the left sliding touch on the right edge The corresponding operation is the "exit" operation command. Referring to (b) in Figure 13, the user can start sliding from the lower edge of the smart tablet screen to generate a sliding instruction from bottom to top. Different from the upward sliding instruction initiated within the screen, the above sliding instruction is based on the screen. The lower edge is the starting point, so the smart tablet will recognize that the sliding command is for application window management, as shown in (c) in Figure 13. The user can close the corresponding application through this application window management, or switch to other applications. Perform operations. Of course, the operation instructions corresponding to the edge gestures can be set according to actual conditions, and the operation instructions corresponding to the edge gestures are not limited here.
在本实施例中,由于边缘手势往往是针对具体某一个操作窗口的,因此在将边缘手势类型的操作指令进行转换之前,需要先确定该操作指令所操作的操作窗口。由于对于不同的窗口类型,同一边缘手势对应的操作指令会存在差异,为了提高触控操作的准确性,智能平板首先需要确定所需操作的目标窗口,继而确定该目标窗口对应的窗口类型。In this embodiment, since edge gestures are often targeted at a specific operation window, before converting an edge gesture type operation instruction, the operation window operated by the operation instruction needs to be determined first. Since the operation instructions corresponding to the same edge gesture will be different for different window types, in order to improve the accuracy of touch operations, the smart tablet first needs to determine the target window for the required operation, and then determine the window type corresponding to the target window.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述窗口类型包括:父窗口类型以及子窗口类型。每一个预设应用对应一个父窗口类型的操作窗口,而在该父窗口类型内可以包含有多个页面跳转控件,用户可以通过点击父窗口类型的操作界面中任一页面跳转控件,进入对应的子窗口类型的操作界面;同样地,子窗口类型的操作界面中还可以包含有页面跳转控件,以进入二级操作窗口,依次类推,其中,二级操作窗口的窗口类型也属于子窗口类型。不同的窗口类型对于同一边缘手势具有不同的响应方式。In a possible implementation, the above window types include: parent window types and child window types. Each preset application corresponds to an operation window of the parent window type, and the parent window type can contain multiple page jump controls. The user can click on any page jump control in the operation interface of the parent window type to enter The operation interface of the corresponding sub-window type; similarly, the operation interface of the sub-window type can also include a page jump control to enter the secondary operation window, and so on. Among them, the window type of the secondary operation window also belongs to the sub-window type. Window type. Different window types respond differently to the same edge gesture.
示例性地,图14示出了不同窗口类型对于同一边缘手势的响应对比图。By way of example, Figure 14 shows a comparison chart of responses of different window types to the same edge gesture.
参见图14中的(a)所示,用户所需操作的目标窗口的窗口类型具体为子窗口类型,例如在文本编辑应用中打开了本地存储的某一文档,且该文档并没有被修改。此时,用户发起一个从右侧边缘为起点的左滑操作,智能平板识别该左滑操作为边缘手势类型的第一触控操作,此时,即识别需要退出该目标窗口,返回上一级窗口,因此会关闭上述目标窗口,返回预设应用对应的父操作窗口(也可以称为主操作界面)。Referring to (a) in Figure 14, the window type of the target window that the user needs to operate is specifically a sub-window type. For example, a locally stored document is opened in a text editing application, and the document has not been modified. At this time, the user initiates a left-swipe operation starting from the right edge, and the smart tablet recognizes the left-swipe operation as the first touch operation of the edge gesture type. At this time, it recognizes that it is necessary to exit the target window and return to the previous level. window, therefore the above target window will be closed and the parent operation window corresponding to the default application will be returned (which can also be called the main operation interface).
参见图14中的(b)所示,用户所需操作的目标窗口仍为文本编辑应用中的子窗口(即目标窗口类型为子窗口类型),但在该例子中,用户已经编辑过该文档的部分内容,在发起由边缘手势的触控操作时,即需要返回上一级窗口,但由于上述文档并没有保存,会生成一个保存提示框,以确认用户是否用户需要对编辑的内容进行保存,若点击保存控件141,则会返回主操作界面;若点击取消控件143,则返回对文档编辑的目标窗口,若点击不保存控件142,则不对编辑进行保存,并返回主操作界面。Referring to (b) in Figure 14, the target window for the user's operation is still a sub-window in the text editing application (that is, the target window type is a sub-window type), but in this example, the user has already edited the document For some content, when initiating a touch operation by edge gesture, you need to return to the previous window. However, since the above document has not been saved, a save prompt box will be generated to confirm whether the user needs to save the edited content. , if you click the save control 141, you will return to the main operation interface; if you click the cancel control 143, you will return to the target window for document editing; if you click the do not save control 142, the edit will not be saved and you will return to the main operation interface.
参见图14中的(c)所示,用户所需操作的目标窗口的窗口类型具体为父窗口类型,在该情况下,发起从右侧边缘为起点的左滑动操作时,并不会立即退出该应用程序,会提示用户再次退出,此时,用户可以再次发起上述的从右侧边缘为起点的左滑动操作,则会退出上述应用程序,返回智能平板的桌面界面。Referring to (c) in Figure 14, the window type of the target window that the user needs to operate is specifically the parent window type. In this case, when a left sliding operation is initiated from the right edge as the starting point, the window will not exit immediately. The application will prompt the user to exit again. At this time, the user can initiate the above-mentioned left sliding operation starting from the right edge again, and the above-mentioned application will exit and return to the desktop interface of the smart tablet.
由此可见,对于不同的窗口类型,在接收到同一边缘手势时,对应的响应方式存在差异,基于此,智能平板需要预设应用当前操作的目标窗口对应的窗口类型,并查询该边缘触控操作关联的响应方式(如上述的退出页面,又或者应用窗口管理等)以及窗口类型进行封装,生成对应的第一触控事件。其中,上述响应方式可以根据本地记录的触控手势与响应方式之间的对应关系确 定。It can be seen that for different window types, when receiving the same edge gesture, the corresponding response methods are different. Based on this, the smart tablet needs to preset the window type corresponding to the target window of the current operation of the application, and query the edge touch The response method associated with the operation (such as the above-mentioned exit page, or application window management, etc.) and window type are encapsulated to generate the corresponding first touch event. Among them, the above response mode can be determined based on the corresponding relationship between the locally recorded touch gestures and the response mode. Certainly.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,确定窗口类型的实现方式具体包含以下步骤:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, the implementation of determining the window type specifically includes the following steps:
在S1201.1中,通过所述第一触控模块中的触控管理单元监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作。In S1201.1, the touch operation initiated by the user is monitored through the touch management unit in the first touch module.
在S1201.2中,若通过所述触控管理单元识别得到所述触控操作为所述第一触控操作,则调用所述第一触控模块中的触控窗口管理单元确定所述目标窗口的所述窗口类型;所述触控窗口管理单元用于建立所述预设应用中各个操作窗口的级联关系。In S1201.2, if the touch management unit identifies that the touch operation is the first touch operation, the touch window management unit in the first touch module is called to determine the target. The window type of the window; the touch window management unit is used to establish a cascade relationship between each operation window in the preset application.
在本实施例中,第一触控模块内包含有触控管理单元以及触控窗口管理单元。其中,触控管理单元具体用于监听在第一操作系统内发起的触控操作,并在检测到用户发起触控操作后,对该触控操作的类型进行确定,以转发给对应的单元进行处理。In this embodiment, the first touch module includes a touch management unit and a touch window management unit. Among them, the touch management unit is specifically used to monitor touch operations initiated in the first operating system, and after detecting that the user initiates a touch operation, determine the type of the touch operation and forward it to the corresponding unit for processing. deal with.
在本实施例中,该触控管理单元在识别到用户发起的触控操作为边缘手势类型的第一触控操作时,会确定该第一触控操作对应的响应方式,并将该第一触控操作发送给触控窗口管理单元,确定当前操作的目标窗口的窗口类型。由于触控窗口管理单元在运行预设应用的过程中,会维护应用程序内各个操作窗口的级联关系,即用于确定各个窗口属于父窗口类型或是子窗口类型,基于此,触控窗口管理单元可以通过上述级联关系确定上述目标窗口的窗口类型,在确定响应方式以及窗口类型后,可以生成阈值对应的第一触控事件,并发送给第二触控单元。In this embodiment, when the touch management unit recognizes that the touch operation initiated by the user is a first touch operation of the edge gesture type, it will determine the response mode corresponding to the first touch operation, and assign the first touch operation to the first touch operation. The touch operation is sent to the touch window management unit to determine the window type of the target window of the current operation. Since the touch window management unit maintains the cascading relationship of each operation window in the application during the process of running the preset application, that is, it is used to determine whether each window belongs to the parent window type or the child window type. Based on this, the touch window The management unit can determine the window type of the target window through the cascade relationship. After determining the response mode and window type, the management unit can generate a first touch event corresponding to the threshold and send it to the second touch unit.
在本申请实施例中,通过触控管理单元进行触控操作类型的识别,并转发给对应的单元进行后续响应,能够提高触控事件生成的准确性。In the embodiment of the present application, the touch management unit identifies the touch operation type and forwards it to the corresponding unit for subsequent response, which can improve the accuracy of touch event generation.
在S1202中,通过所述第二触控模块中的窗口管理单元生成对于所述目标窗口的第一操作指令。In S1202, a first operation instruction for the target window is generated through the window management unit in the second touch module.
在本实施例中,第二触控窗口配置有窗口管理单元,用于管理运行于第二操作系统内的各个预设应用的操作窗口。因此,在第二触控模块接收到第一触控模块发送的第一触控事件后,在检测到该第一触控事件为边缘手势的触控事件后,会将该触控事件发送给接收到窗口管理单元,并通过窗口管理单元生成与该第一触控事件对应的第一操作指令,以便预设应用执行对应的操作。In this embodiment, the second touch window is configured with a window management unit for managing operation windows of each default application running in the second operating system. Therefore, after the second touch module receives the first touch event sent by the first touch module and detects that the first touch event is an edge gesture touch event, it will send the touch event to The window management unit is received, and the first operation instruction corresponding to the first touch event is generated through the window management unit, so that the preset application performs the corresponding operation.
在S1203中,第二操作系统通过所述预设应用执行操作指令。In S1203, the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
由于S1203的实现方式与S703的实现方式完全相同,具体描述可以参见S703的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Since the implementation of S1203 is exactly the same as the implementation of S703, please refer to the relevant description of S703 for specific description, which will not be described again here.
在本申请实施例中,由于不同的窗口类型的响应方式不同,在响应边缘手势类型的触控操作时,先确定所需操作的目标窗口的窗口类型,能够提高后续对于窗口操作的准确性,使得对于跨系统的预设应用的操作与基于第一操作系统搭建的原生应用的操作习惯一致,减少了用户操作所需的学习成本。In the embodiment of the present application, since different window types have different response modes, when responding to an edge gesture type touch operation, first determining the window type of the target window for the required operation can improve the accuracy of subsequent window operations. This makes the operation of cross-system preset applications consistent with the operation habits of native applications built based on the first operating system, reducing the learning cost required for user operations.
类型2:针对多触点类型的第二触控操作。Type 2: Second touch operation for multi-touch type.
参见图15所示,图15示出了本申请一实施例对于多触点类型的触控输入的方法的实现流程图。参见图15所示,与图7所示的实施例相比,本申请实施例提供的触控输入的方法中,S702具体为S1501,S703具体为S1502,S704具体为S1503,具体描述如下:Referring to FIG. 15 , FIG. 15 shows an implementation flow chart of a multi-contact type touch input method according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 15, compared with the embodiment shown in Figure 7, in the touch input method provided by the embodiment of the present application, S702 is specifically S1501, S703 is specifically S1502, and S704 is specifically S1503. The specific description is as follows:
在S1501中,通过所述第一触控模块生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二触控模块。所述多点触控事件包括在所述第一操作系统内各个所述触点的第一触控坐标以及触控时间。In S1501, the first touch module generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation, and transmits the multi-touch event to the second touch module. The multi-touch event includes the first touch coordinates and touch time of each touch point in the first operating system.
在本实施例中,一般情况下,安卓系统的设备,往往支持多触点的触控操作,例如通过双指对图像进行放大缩小以及旋转等图像变换操作,又或者通过长按拖动的方式移动页面中的显示对象等。因此,用户在智能平板上发起多触点类型的触控操作后,第一触控模块可以生成对应的多点触控事件,该多点触控事件内可以包含有本次发起的触控操作对应的各个触点对应的第一触控坐标(即在第一操作系统内对应的坐标),第一触控模块在生成多点触控事件后会将其发送给第二触控模块进行后续处理。In this embodiment, under normal circumstances, Android system devices often support multi-touch touch operations, such as image transformation operations such as zooming in, zooming out, and rotating images through two fingers, or long pressing and dragging. Move display objects in the page, etc. Therefore, after the user initiates a multi-touch type touch operation on the smart tablet, the first touch module can generate a corresponding multi-touch event, and the multi-touch event can include the touch operation initiated this time. The first touch coordinates corresponding to each corresponding touch point (that is, the corresponding coordinates in the first operating system), the first touch module will send it to the second touch module for subsequent processing after generating a multi-touch event. deal with.
在本实施例中,根据不同的触点对应的第一触控坐标以及触控时间,能够依次连接各个触控点,从而构成了该第二触控操作对应的触控轨迹。In this embodiment, each touch point can be connected in sequence according to the first touch coordinates and touch time corresponding to different touch points, thereby forming a touch trajectory corresponding to the second touch operation.
示例性地,图16示出了本申请一实施例提供的多触点类型的触控操作的示意图。参见图16中的(a),预设应用的操作界面中显示有一图像,用户可以通过双指往外移动的方式对该图像放 大。参见图16中的(b),预设应用的操作界面内显示有一文档,由于文档内容较多,该文档中配置有一进度条,用户可以拖动该进度条以查看文档内对应的段落,例如通过上滑的方式查看文档中下一段落的内容。需要说明的是,多触点的操作根据不同的应用具有不同的响应方式,具体根据实际情况进行设置,再不做限定。Exemplarily, FIG. 16 shows a schematic diagram of a multi-contact type touch operation provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to (a) in Figure 16, an image is displayed in the operation interface of the default application. The user can move the two fingers outward to position the image. big. Referring to (b) in Figure 16, a document is displayed in the operation interface of the default application. Since the document contains a lot of content, a progress bar is configured in the document. The user can drag the progress bar to view the corresponding paragraphs in the document, for example Swipe up to view the content of the next paragraph in the document. It should be noted that multi-contact operations have different response methods according to different applications. The specific settings are based on the actual situation and are not limited.
进一步地,作为本申请另一实施例,生成多点触控事件的具体方式包括:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, specific ways of generating multi-touch events include:
在S1501.1中,通过所述第一触控模块中的触控管理单元监听所述用户发起的触控操作;In S1501.1, monitor the touch operation initiated by the user through the touch management unit in the first touch module;
在S1501.2中,若通过所述触控管理单元识别得到所述触控操作为第二触控操作,则通过所述第一触控模块中的触控事件转换单元对所述第二触控操作进行合法校验。In S1501.2, if the touch management unit recognizes that the touch operation is a second touch operation, the touch event conversion unit in the first touch module processes the second touch operation. Perform legal verification of control operations.
在S1501.3中,若识别得到所述第二触控操作通过所述合法校验,则通过所述触控事件转换单元生成多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件发送给所述第二触控模块;所述多点触控事件记录有在所述第一操作系统内各个所述触点的第一触控坐标。In S1501.3, if it is recognized that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, a multi-touch event is generated through the touch event conversion unit, and the multi-touch event is sent to The second touch module; the multi-touch event records the first touch coordinates of each contact point in the first operating system.
在本实施例中,第一触控模块内包含触控管理单元以及触控事件转换单元。其中,上述触控管理单元用于监听在第一操作系统内发起的触控操作,并在检测到该触控操作为多触点类型的第二触控操作后,将该第二触控操作转发给触控事件转换单元进行后续处理。In this embodiment, the first touch module includes a touch management unit and a touch event conversion unit. Wherein, the above-mentioned touch management unit is used to monitor the touch operation initiated in the first operating system, and after detecting that the touch operation is a second touch operation of multi-contact type, the second touch operation is Forwarded to the touch event conversion unit for subsequent processing.
在本实施例中,触控事件转换单元在接收到上述第二触控事件后,会先对其合法性进行校验,即本次多触点出操作是否为有效的操作。若上述触控事件转换单元在检测到上述第二触控类型通过合法校验后,则可以转换为能够被第二操作系统识别的多点触控事件。其中,该多点触控事件内可以包含有各个触点在第一操作系统内的第一触控坐标。In this embodiment, after receiving the above-mentioned second touch event, the touch event conversion unit will first verify its legality, that is, whether this multi-touch out operation is a valid operation. If the touch event conversion unit detects that the second touch type passes legal verification, it can convert it into a multi-touch event that can be recognized by the second operating system. The multi-touch event may include first touch coordinates of each touch point in the first operating system.
在本申请实施例中,通过触控事件转换单元对触控操作进行合法校验并进行事件转换,从而能够生成能够被其他操作系统识别的多点触控事件,提高了多触点的触控操作的准确性,减少了对于无效操作的响应。In the embodiment of the present application, the touch event conversion unit performs legal verification on the touch operation and performs event conversion, thereby generating multi-touch events that can be recognized by other operating systems, thereby improving multi-touch touch control. Operational accuracy reduces responses to invalid operations.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,在S1501.3之后,还可以包括:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, after S1501.3, it may also include:
在S1501.4中,若通过所述触控事件转换单元识别得到所述第二触控操作并非对于所述预设应用的操作,则向第二触控模块发送关于所述多点触控事件的取消响应指令,以停止所述预设应用执行关于所述第二触控操作的所述操作指令。In S1501.4, if it is recognized through the touch event conversion unit that the second touch operation is not an operation for the preset application, send information about the multi-touch event to the second touch module. cancel response instruction to stop the default application from executing the operation instruction related to the second touch operation.
在本实施例中,上述触控事件转换单元还用于取消异常的触控操作,由于用户发起多触点的第二触控操作需要一定的操作时间,因此,有可能用户在并没有绘制完成整个滑动轨迹时,触控事件转换单元已经将前面采集得到的多点触控事件发送给第二触控事件,而在绘制完成整个滑动轨迹后,该滑动轨迹与预设的快捷手势一致,即其操作对应并非针对预设应用的,此时,需要停止预设应用对于该第二触控操作进行响应,在该情况下,第一触控模块内的触控事件转换模块可以生成一个取消响应指令,并将该取消响应指令发送给第二触控模块,在第二触控模块接收到该取消响应指令后,会停止预设应用对于该第二触控操作进行响应。In this embodiment, the above-mentioned touch event conversion unit is also used to cancel an abnormal touch operation. Since the user initiates a second touch operation with multiple touch points, it takes a certain amount of operation time. Therefore, it is possible that the user has not completed the drawing. When the entire sliding trajectory is drawn, the touch event conversion unit has already sent the previously collected multi-touch event to the second touch event. After the entire sliding trajectory is drawn, the sliding trajectory is consistent with the preset shortcut gesture, that is, The operation correspondence is not for the default application. At this time, the default application needs to be stopped from responding to the second touch operation. In this case, the touch event conversion module in the first touch module can generate a cancellation response. command, and sends the cancel response command to the second touch module. After the second touch module receives the cancel response command, it stops the default application from responding to the second touch operation.
示例性地,图17示出了本申请一实施例提供的取消响应多触点操作的示意图。参见图17中的(a)所示,用户发起一个类似向下滑动的多触点的触控操作,此时,触控事件转换单元在对上述触控轨迹进行完整校验,并在完整校验通过后,生成对应的多点触控事件并发送给第二触控模块。而与此同时,用户继续在第一操作系统内进行滑动操作,得到如图17中的(b)所示的滑动轨迹,具体为一圆形滑动轨迹,而该圆形滑动轨迹对应的是提高智能平板的显示亮度(即并非针对预设应用,而是针对智能平板的屏幕),此时,触控事件转换单元会生成一个取消响应指令,并将该取消响应指令发送给第二触控模块,以便停止预设应用对该圆形滑动轨迹进行响应。Exemplarily, FIG. 17 shows a schematic diagram of canceling response to a multi-touch operation provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to (a) in Figure 17, the user initiates a multi-touch touch operation similar to sliding downwards. At this time, the touch event conversion unit performs a complete verification on the above touch trajectory and completes the verification. After passing the verification, the corresponding multi-touch event is generated and sent to the second touch module. At the same time, the user continues to perform sliding operations in the first operating system, and obtains a sliding trajectory as shown in (b) in Figure 17, specifically a circular sliding trajectory, and the circular sliding trajectory corresponds to the improvement of The display brightness of the smart tablet (that is, not for the default application, but for the screen of the smart tablet). At this time, the touch event conversion unit will generate a cancellation response command and send the cancellation response command to the second touch module to stop the default app from responding to the circular sliding trajectory.
在S1502中,通过所述第二触控模块对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令。In S1502, the second touch module performs coordinate transformation on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
在本实施例中,虽然第一操作界面以及第二操作界面可以共用相同的内核,但在渲染操作界面时可以根据实际的显示界面进行调整,因此在第一操作系统内确定得到的第一触控坐标与在第二操作系统内的坐标存在一定的偏差,需要通过第二触控模块进行坐标转换,从而使得生成的第二操作指令能够准确地对运行于第二操作系统的预设应用中的指定内容进行操作,并根据转换后的坐标得到第二操作指令。In this embodiment, although the first operation interface and the second operation interface can share the same kernel, the operation interface can be adjusted according to the actual display interface when rendering. Therefore, the first touch is determined in the first operating system. There is a certain deviation between the control coordinates and the coordinates in the second operating system, and coordinate conversion needs to be performed through the second touch module, so that the generated second operation instructions can accurately execute the preset application running in the second operating system. Operate on the specified content, and obtain the second operation instruction based on the converted coordinates.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,上述生成第二操作指令的具体过程包括: Further, as another embodiment of the present application, the above-mentioned specific process of generating the second operation instruction includes:
在S1502.1中,通过所述第二触控模块中的多点触控管理单元对所述多点触控事件进行完整校验。In S1502.1, the multi-touch event is completely verified through the multi-touch management unit in the second touch module.
在S1502.2中,若通过所述多点触控管理单元识别得到所述多点触控事件通过所述完整校验,则通过所述第二触控模块中的触控窗口转换单元对所述多点触控事件内的各个所述触点进行坐标转换,确定各个所述第一触控坐标在所述容器中运行的预设应用对应的第二触控坐标;所述第二触控坐标是根据在所述第一操作系统中所述预设应用的第一窗口的尺寸、所述预设应用在所述第二操作系统中对应的第二窗口的尺寸以及所述第一触控坐标确定的;所述第一窗口是为所述第二窗口在所述第一操作系统下的映射窗口。In S1502.2, if it is recognized through the multi-touch management unit that the multi-touch event passes the complete verification, then the touch window conversion unit in the second touch module Each of the touch points in the multi-touch event performs coordinate conversion to determine the second touch coordinates corresponding to each of the first touch coordinates of the preset application running in the container; the second touch The coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system, the size of the second window corresponding to the preset application in the second operating system, and the first touch The coordinates are determined; the first window is a mapping window for the second window under the first operating system.
在S1502.3中,通过所述触控窗口转换单元确定所述预设应用中所需操作的目标窗口,并基于所述第二触点坐标生成作用于所述目标窗口的第二操作指令。In S1502.3, the touch window conversion unit determines the target window for the required operation in the preset application, and generates a second operation instruction acting on the target window based on the second touch point coordinates.
在本实施例中,第二触控模块中包含有多触点管理单元,该多触点管理单元具体用于管理第二操作系统中各个运行的应用的触摸输入事件,上述触摸输入事件支持多触点处理,以及对上述触摸输入事件进行完整性校验。因此,在第二触控模块接收到触摸事件转换单元发送的多点触控事件后,可以先通过所述多触点管理单元进行完整性校验,在检测到上述多点触控事件为对应的滑动轨迹完整后,才进行坐标转换。In this embodiment, the second touch module includes a multi-touch management unit. The multi-touch management unit is specifically used to manage touch input events of each application running in the second operating system. The above touch input events support multiple Contact processing, and integrity verification of the above touch input events. Therefore, after the second touch module receives the multi-touch event sent by the touch event conversion unit, it can first perform an integrity check through the multi-touch management unit. After detecting the multi-touch event, the corresponding The coordinate transformation is performed only after the sliding trajectory is complete.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在通过完整校验后,上述多触点管理单元还可以确定该多点触控事件所操作的应用,由于在第一操作系统内可以通过多窗口的方式同时运行多个不同应用,因此,在第二操作系统侧,同样需要对应的单元以确定上述多点触控事件对应的预设应用。具体地,确定预设应用的方式可以根据各个触点所落入的位置所落入的区域,根据该区域是哪一个应用的窗口,从而能够将触点所落入的窗口所属的应用识别为预设应用。In a possible implementation, after passing the complete verification, the above-mentioned multi-touch management unit can also determine the application operated by the multi-touch event, because in the first operating system, multiple windows can be used simultaneously Multiple different applications are run. Therefore, on the second operating system side, a corresponding unit is also needed to determine the preset application corresponding to the multi-touch event. Specifically, the method of determining the preset application can be based on the area where each touch point falls, and which application window the area is, so that the application to which the window where the touch point falls can be identified as Default application.
在一种可能的实现方式中,上述多点触控事件中携带有所需操作的预设应用的应用标识,多触点管理单元可以通过提取上述多点触控事件中的应用标识,以确定在第二操作系统内运行的预设应用。In a possible implementation, the multi-touch event carries the application identifier of the preset application for the required operation, and the multi-touch management unit can extract the application identifier from the multi-touch event to determine Default applications that run within the second operating system.
在本实施例中,在确定了多点触控事件的完整性后,上述多触点管理单元会将多点触控事件发送给触控窗口转换单元,触控窗口转换单元可以从上述多点触控事件中提取包含的第一触控坐标,以及确定预设应用在第二操作系统内运行时对应的第二窗口的尺寸,然后根据在第一操作系统内预设应用对应的第一窗的口尺寸以及上述第二窗口的尺寸,可以确定在不同操作系统间坐标的偏移量,并基于该偏移量调整各个第一触控坐标,最后能够计算得到各个触点在第二操作系统内对应的第二触点坐标。In this embodiment, after determining the integrity of the multi-touch event, the multi-touch management unit will send the multi-touch event to the touch window conversion unit. The touch window conversion unit can obtain the multi-touch event from the multi-touch event. Extract the first touch coordinate contained in the touch event, and determine the size of the second window corresponding to the default application when running in the second operating system, and then determine the size of the first window corresponding to the default application in the first operating system. The size of the window and the size of the above-mentioned second window can determine the offset of the coordinates between different operating systems, and adjust each first touch coordinate based on the offset. Finally, the position of each touch point in the second operating system can be calculated. The corresponding coordinates of the second contact point within.
在本实施例中,触控窗口转换单元除了实现坐标转换后,还用于确定预设应用中所需操作的目标窗口,将基于多个触点的第二触点坐标的第二操作指令传递给对应的目标窗口,以便预设应用中对应的目标窗口执行上述第二操作指令。In this embodiment, in addition to implementing coordinate conversion, the touch window conversion unit is also used to determine the target window for the required operation in the preset application, and transmit the second operation instruction based on the coordinates of the second contact point of the multiple contacts. Give the corresponding target window, so that the corresponding target window in the preset application executes the above second operation instruction.
在本申请实施例中,通过触控窗口转换单元实现坐标转换以及窗口确认,以及通过多点触控管理单元确定所需操作的应用程序,从而提高了触控操作的准确性。In the embodiment of the present application, coordinate conversion and window confirmation are implemented through the touch window conversion unit, and the application program for the required operation is determined through the multi-touch management unit, thereby improving the accuracy of the touch operation.
在S1503中,第二操作系统通过所述预设应用执行操作指令。In S1503, the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
由于S1503的实现方式与S703的实现方式完全相同,具体描述可以参见S703的相关描述,在此不再赘述。Since the implementation method of S1503 is exactly the same as the implementation method of S703, please refer to the relevant description of S703 for specific description, which will not be described again here.
在本申请实施例中,通过第二触控模块实现对触控坐标进行转换,从而使得触控操作也能够对跨系统运行的预设应用进行精准操作,从而实现了多触点类型的操作也能够实现跨系统的传输以及识别,提高了跨系统操作的可使用范围。In the embodiment of the present application, the touch coordinates are converted through the second touch module, so that the touch operation can also accurately operate the preset applications running across the system, thereby realizing multi-touch type operations. It can realize cross-system transmission and identification, improving the usable scope of cross-system operations.
类型3:针对预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作。Type 3: The third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application.
参见图18所示,图18示出了本申请一实施例对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的触控输入的方法的实现流程图。参见图18所示,与图7所示的实施例相比,本申请实施例提供的触控输入的方法中,S702具体为S1801,S703具体为S1802,S703具体为S1803,在S703之后,还包括S1804,具体描述如下:Referring to FIG. 18 , FIG. 18 shows an implementation flow chart of a touch input method for clicking on any area in a preset application according to an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 18, compared with the embodiment shown in Figure 7, in the touch input method provided by the embodiment of the present application, S702 is specifically S1801, S703 is specifically S1802, and S703 is specifically S1803. After S703, Including S1804, the specific description is as follows:
在S1801中,通过所述第一触控模块生成第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件;所述光标位移触控事件包含有所述触控操作对应的第三触控坐标。 In S1801, the first touch module generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to a third touch operation; the cursor displacement touch event includes a third touch coordinate corresponding to the touch operation.
在本实施例中,用户可以在预设应用对应的操作界面内通过点击选择对应的页面控件,也可以通过点击对可编辑区域进行字符输入,因此,为了区分上述两种不同的操作类型,第一操作系统可以通过第一触控模块生成上述的光标位移触控事件,该光标位移触控事件包含用户本次在预设应用对应的操作界面中发起点击的坐标,即上述的第三触控坐标。In this embodiment, the user can click to select the corresponding page control in the operation interface corresponding to the preset application, and can also click to input characters into the editable area. Therefore, in order to distinguish the above two different operation types, the first An operating system can generate the above-mentioned cursor displacement touch event through the first touch module. The cursor displacement touch event includes the coordinates of the user's click in the operation interface corresponding to the default application, that is, the above-mentioned third touch event. coordinate.
在本实施例中,由于通过代理应用在第一操作系统生成的关于预设应用的操作界面具体为一图像数据,即在第一操作系统内并不存在对应的可操作控件,对于区域类型的识别需要交由运行有第二操作系统的容器进行确定,即第一触控模块需要确定本次点击操作的位置(即第三触控坐标),并生成对应的光标位移触控事件。In this embodiment, since the operation interface for the default application generated in the first operating system through the proxy application is specifically an image data, that is, there is no corresponding operable control in the first operating system. For area type The identification needs to be determined by the container running the second operating system, that is, the first touch module needs to determine the position of this click operation (ie, the third touch coordinate) and generate the corresponding cursor displacement touch event.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,生成上述光标位移触控事件具体包括以下步骤:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, generating the above-mentioned cursor displacement touch event specifically includes the following steps:
在S1801.1中,通过所述第一触控模块中的触控管理单元监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作。In S1801.1, the touch operation initiated by the user is monitored through the touch management unit in the first touch module.
在本实施例中,第一触控模块内包含触控管理单元其中,上述触控管理单元用于监听在第一操作系统内发起的触控操作,并在检测到该触控操作为第三触控操作后,将该第三触控操作转发给触控事件转换单元进行后续处理。In this embodiment, the first touch module includes a touch management unit, wherein the touch management unit is used to monitor the touch operation initiated in the first operating system, and detect that the touch operation is the third After the touch operation, the third touch operation is forwarded to the touch event conversion unit for subsequent processing.
在S1801.2中,若通过所述触控管理单元识别得到所述触控操作为第三触控操作,通过所述第一触控模块中的触控事件转换单元对所述第三触控操作进行合法校验。In S1801.2, if the touch management unit identifies that the touch operation is a third touch operation, the touch event conversion unit in the first touch module The operation is checked for legality.
在S1801.3中,若通过所述触控管理单元识别得到所述第三触控操作通过所述合法校验,则通过所述触控事件转换单元生成点击识别事件,并将所述点击识别事件发送给输入触控检测单元。In S1801.3, if the third touch operation passes the legal verification through the touch management unit, a click recognition event is generated through the touch event conversion unit, and the click recognition event is generated. The event is sent to the input touch detection unit.
在本实施例中,上述第一触控模块还包括:触控事件转换单元以及输入触控检测单元,该触控事件转换单元具体用于转化成第二操作系统能够识别的触摸事件输入;该输入触控检测单元具体用于识别用户发起的点击操作具体的点击类型。In this embodiment, the above-mentioned first touch module further includes: a touch event conversion unit and an input touch detection unit, the touch event conversion unit is specifically used to convert into a touch event input that can be recognized by the second operating system; The input touch detection unit is specifically used to identify the specific click type of the click operation initiated by the user.
在本实施例中,在触控管理单元将该第三触控操作转发给上述的触控事件转换单元后,触控事件转换单元可以对该第三触控操作进行合法性校验。若该第三触控操作没有通过合法校验,则第一操作系统可以不对该第三触控操作进行响应;反之,若该第三触控操作为有效的触控操作,则可以通过输入触控检测单元识别用户对于预设应用中任一区域发起的点击操作具体为何种点击类型。In this embodiment, after the touch management unit forwards the third touch operation to the above-mentioned touch event conversion unit, the touch event conversion unit may perform legality verification on the third touch operation. If the third touch operation does not pass the legal verification, the first operating system may not respond to the third touch operation; conversely, if the third touch operation is a valid touch operation, the first operating system may respond to the input touch operation. The control detection unit identifies the specific click type of the click operation initiated by the user on any area in the preset application.
在S1801.4中,响应于所述点击识别事件,通过所述输入触控检测单元识别所述第三触控操作对应的点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标,并将基于所述点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标生成的光标位移事件发送给所述第二触控模块。In S1801.4, in response to the click recognition event, the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinate are identified through the input touch detection unit, and based on the click type And the cursor displacement event generated by the third touch coordinate is sent to the second touch module.
在本实施例中,不同的点击类型对应的响应方式。上述点击类型包括但并不限于:单击、双击以及长按等点击操作。对于单击类型的点击操作,可以用于选择预设应用中的某一显示对象,又或者在点击到可编辑区域时则表示需要对该区域进行文本输入;对于双击类型的点击操作,可能是用于快取选取该区域对应的文本内容;对于长按类型的点击操作,则可以是用于弹出对应的文本编辑菜单,以实现所选文本进行复制、黏贴以及删除等操作。由此可见,不同的点击操作可以对应不同的响应方式(即可以生成不同的操作指令),基于此,第一操作系统在接收到上述第三触控操作后,需要通过触控检测单元确定其对应的点击类型,并根据点击类型以及对应的点击位置(即第三触控坐标)生成光标移动事件,并将该光标移动事件发送给第二触控模块。In this embodiment, different click types correspond to response modes. The above click types include but are not limited to: click operations such as single click, double click, and long press. For single-click click operations, it can be used to select a display object in a preset application, or when clicking on an editable area, it means that text input is required in this area; for double-click click operations, it may be It is used to cache and select the text content corresponding to the area; for long-press type click operations, it can be used to pop up the corresponding text editing menu to realize operations such as copying, pasting, and deleting the selected text. It can be seen that different click operations can correspond to different response modes (that is, different operation instructions can be generated). Based on this, after receiving the above-mentioned third touch operation, the first operating system needs to determine its operation through the touch detection unit. The corresponding click type is generated, and a cursor movement event is generated according to the click type and the corresponding click position (ie, the third touch coordinate), and the cursor movement event is sent to the second touch module.
在本实施例中,由于代理应用返回关于预设应用的操作界面具体可以为一图像数据,即并对于不同区域在第一操作系统内均是以像素的形式展示,无法确定各个区域的区域类型,基于此,第一操作系统需要借助第二操作系统以确定点击区域的区域类型,例如确定用户点击的区域是可编辑区域或是非编辑区域,因此需要将光标移动事件发送给运行有第二操作系统的容器进行后续的识别操作。In this embodiment, since the operation interface returned by the proxy application about the default application can be specifically an image data, that is, different areas are displayed in the form of pixels in the first operating system, and the area type of each area cannot be determined. , Based on this, the first operating system needs to use the second operating system to determine the area type of the click area, for example, determine whether the area clicked by the user is an editable area or a non-editable area, so it needs to send the cursor movement event to the second operation The system's container performs subsequent identification operations.
在本申请实施例中,通过第一触控模块内的触控管理单元进行完整识别,在确定了第三触控操作校验通过的情况下,调用触控检测单元确定第三触控操作的点击类型以及第三触控坐标,继而生成对应的光标位移事件,将该光标位移事件发送给第二触控模块,以进行后续的识别处理,从而在进行界面反馈时,运行有第二操作系统的容器只需将操作界面的图像发送给第一操作系统,在确保用户能够顺利选择操作界面中包含的控件的基础上,减少了在跨系统的应用操作过程所需传输的数据量,继而提高了跨系统的应用操作的响应速度。 In the embodiment of the present application, complete identification is performed through the touch management unit in the first touch module. When it is determined that the third touch operation has passed the verification, the touch detection unit is called to determine the status of the third touch operation. Click type and third touch coordinates, and then generate a corresponding cursor displacement event, and send the cursor displacement event to the second touch module for subsequent recognition processing, so that when providing interface feedback, the second operating system is running The container only needs to send the image of the operation interface to the first operating system. On the basis of ensuring that the user can smoothly select the controls contained in the operation interface, it reduces the amount of data that needs to be transmitted during the cross-system application operation process, thereby improving Improves the response speed of cross-system application operations.
在S1802中,通过所述第二触控模块识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令。In S1802, the second touch module identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type.
在本实施例中,第一触控模块将光标位移事件发送给第二触控模块后,第二触控模块可以从上述的光标位移事件中提取第三触控坐标,并在第二操作系统内的预设应用中确定该第三触控坐标对应的点击区域,继而可以根据该点击区域对应的区域类型,如根据该区域内是否包含可点击控件、可输入的文本框、图像数据等,根据显示内容的不同识别得到对应的区域类型,并将识别得到的区域类型反馈给第一触控模块。In this embodiment, after the first touch module sends the cursor displacement event to the second touch module, the second touch module can extract the third touch coordinates from the above-mentioned cursor displacement event and use it in the second operating system The click area corresponding to the third touch coordinate is determined in the default application in the click area, and then the area type corresponding to the click area can be determined, such as whether the area contains clickable controls, input text boxes, image data, etc. Corresponding area types are identified according to different display contents, and the identified area types are fed back to the first touch module.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,识别上述的区域类型的具体过程包括:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, the specific process of identifying the above-mentioned area type includes:
在S1802.1中,通过所述第二触控模块中的点击输入子单元接收所述第一触控模块发送的光标位移事件,并通过所述点击输入子单元将所述预设应用内的虚拟光标更新至所述第三触控坐标。In S1802.1, the cursor displacement event sent by the first touch module is received through the click input sub-unit in the second touch module, and the click input sub-unit in the preset application is The virtual cursor is updated to the third touch coordinate.
在S1802.2中,通过所述第二触控模块中光标分类单元识别更新至所述第三触控坐标时所述虚拟光标的光标样式,并基于所述光标样式确定所述第三触控坐标对应的区域类型。In S1802.2, the cursor classification unit in the second touch module identifies the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determines the third touch based on the cursor style. The area type corresponding to the coordinates.
在本实施例中,第二触控模块包含输入子单元以及光标分类单元。上述输入子单元用于控制光标进行移动;而上述光标分类单元用于确定在应用程序中光标对应的样式,并通过光标样式识别所选择区域对应的区域类型。In this embodiment, the second touch module includes an input subunit and a cursor classification unit. The above-mentioned input subunit is used to control the cursor to move; and the above-mentioned cursor classification unit is used to determine the style corresponding to the cursor in the application program, and identify the area type corresponding to the selected area through the cursor style.
在本实施例中,由于第二操作系统,如Linux系统以及windows系统等,是支持键鼠方式对系统进行控制的,即在对第二操作系统进行操作的过程中,界面会存在对应的光标,以提示鼠标当前所在的界面中的位置。而对于不同界面中不同的区域,其光标样式也会存在差异。示例性地,图19示出了本申请一实施例提供的光标样式的示意图。参见图19中的(a)所示,光标移动至非编辑区域时,如移动至某一可交互控件(插入控件191),此时鼠标光标会显示为箭头样式192;参见图19中的(b)所示,光标移动至可编辑区域时,例如移动至文本编辑区域193时,此时鼠标光标会显示“I”样式194,以提示可以对该区域进行文本数据。由此可见,不同的区域类型对应的光标样式会存在差异,可以通过光标样式的不同实现对于区域类型的判别。In this embodiment, since the second operating system, such as Linux system and Windows system, supports keyboard and mouse control of the system, that is, during the operation of the second operating system, there will be a corresponding cursor on the interface. , to indicate the current position of the mouse in the interface. For different areas in different interfaces, the cursor styles will also be different. Exemplarily, FIG. 19 shows a schematic diagram of a cursor style provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in (a) in Figure 19, when the cursor moves to the non-editing area, such as moving to an interactive control (insert control 191), the mouse cursor will be displayed as an arrow style 192; see (( in Figure 19) As shown in b), when the cursor moves to the editable area, for example, when it moves to the text editing area 193, the mouse cursor will display an "I" style 194 to prompt that text data can be entered in this area. It can be seen that the cursor styles corresponding to different area types will be different, and the area type can be distinguished through the different cursor styles.
在本实施例中,第二触控模块可以通过输入子单元确定光标所需移动的第二触控位置,由于第一操作系统与第二操作系统之间可能存在坐标偏移,因此在确定了用户在第一操作系统内进行点击的第三触控坐标后,第二触控模块可以根据该第三触控坐标以及预设的坐标偏移量,确定在第二操作系统中对应的第二触控位置,并通过输入子单元生成控制光标移动至第二触控位置的移动指令。然后,通过鼠标更新单元将光标移动至上述的第二触控位置,然后在光标移动至第二触控位置后,会根据该区域对应的类型变更对应的光标样式,通过光标分类单元确定该光标样式关联的区域类型,从而能够实现对区域类型的识别,并将识别得到的结果反馈给第一触控模块。In this embodiment, the second touch module can determine the second touch position where the cursor needs to move through the input subunit. Since there may be a coordinate offset between the first operating system and the second operating system, after determining After the user clicks on the third touch coordinate in the first operating system, the second touch module can determine the corresponding second touch coordinate in the second operating system based on the third touch coordinate and the preset coordinate offset. touch position, and generate a movement instruction to control the cursor to move to the second touch position through the input subunit. Then, the cursor is moved to the above-mentioned second touch position through the mouse update unit, and then after the cursor moves to the second touch position, the corresponding cursor style is changed according to the type corresponding to the area, and the cursor is determined through the cursor classification unit The area type associated with the style can recognize the area type and feed the recognition result back to the first touch module.
需要说明的是,由于上述虚拟光标是对于第二操作系统有效的,即上述虚拟光标只是在第二操作系统内部存在,并不会将光标的移动以及显示反馈给第一操作系统,即用户在第一操作系统内对预设应用进行控制时,上述虚拟光标是不可见的,即光标样式的变更只是存在于第二操作系统内,用于识别用户点击区域的区域类型。It should be noted that since the above-mentioned virtual cursor is effective for the second operating system, that is, the above-mentioned virtual cursor only exists inside the second operating system, and the movement and display of the cursor will not be fed back to the first operating system, that is, when the user When the default application is controlled in the first operating system, the virtual cursor is invisible, that is, the change in the cursor style only exists in the second operating system and is used to identify the area type of the user click area.
在本申请实施例中,通过控制光标移动至指定的区域,并通过光标样式识别该区域的区域类型,实现逻辑简单,从而能够提高区域类型识别的效率。In the embodiment of the present application, by controlling the cursor to move to a designated area and identifying the area type of the area through the cursor pattern, the logic is simple, thereby improving the efficiency of area type identification.
在S1803中,第二操作系统通过所述预设应用执行操作指令。In S1803, the second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
在本实施例中,预设应用可以根据用户发起的点击操作,将应用内的虚拟光标移动至指定的区域。若用户点击的为关联有跳转链接的控件,则跳转至指定的页面;若用户点击的为某一虚拟按钮,则可以打开该虚拟按钮关联的菜单,又或者执行与该虚拟按钮对应的操作,若用户点击的区域为可编辑区域,则可以进入文本输入状态。In this embodiment, the default application can move the virtual cursor in the application to a designated area according to a click operation initiated by the user. If the user clicks on a control associated with a jump link, it will jump to the specified page; if the user clicks on a virtual button, the menu associated with the virtual button can be opened, or a function corresponding to the virtual button can be executed. Operation, if the area clicked by the user is an editable area, the user can enter the text input state.
在S1804中,在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,通过所述第一触控模块开启软键盘。In S1804, when it is detected that the area type is an editable area type, the soft keyboard is opened through the first touch module.
在本实施例中,第二触控模块可以将识别得到的区域类型反馈给第一触控模块,若上述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,则表示用户可能需要对该区域进行文本输入,此时可以通过第一触控模块开启内置的软键盘,以便用户通过软键盘完成相应的输入操作。 In this embodiment, the second touch module can feed back the identified area type to the first touch module. If the above area type is an editable area type, it means that the user may need to input text in this area. In this case The built-in soft keyboard can be turned on through the first touch module, so that the user can complete corresponding input operations through the soft keyboard.
在一种可能的实现方式中,若用户在第一操作系统发起上述第三触控操作时,已开启软键盘,则在接收到第三触控操作后,则继续保持上述软键盘处于开启状态。In a possible implementation, if the user has turned on the soft keyboard when the first operating system initiates the third touch operation, then after receiving the third touch operation, the soft keyboard will continue to be turned on. .
示例性地,图20示出了本申请一实施例提供的软键盘开启的示意图。参见图20所示,图20中的(a)所示,为预设应用的操作界面,该操作界面中包含有多个可点击的控件,用户可以点击上述控件以开启对应的菜单,如插入控件201;还包含可编辑的文本输入区域202,在用户点击上述可编辑的文本区域时,通过第二触控模块识别该区域为可编辑区域后,第一触控模块可以开启软键盘203,如图20中的(b)所示,用户可以通过软键盘完成文本输入的操作。Exemplarily, FIG. 20 shows a schematic diagram of opening the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 20, (a) in Figure 20 shows the operation interface of the preset application. The operation interface contains multiple clickable controls. The user can click on the above controls to open the corresponding menu, such as inserting Control 201; also includes an editable text input area 202. When the user clicks on the editable text area, after the second touch module identifies the area as an editable area, the first touch module can open the soft keyboard 203, As shown in (b) in Figure 20, the user can complete the text input operation through the soft keyboard.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,开启软键盘的过程具体可以包括:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, the process of opening the soft keyboard may specifically include:
在S1804.1中,通过所述第一触控模块中的输入触控检测单元向所述第一触控模块内的输入状态识别单元发送点击手势信息,以使所述输入状态识别单元进入监听所述第二触控模块反馈所述区域类型的等待状态。In S1804.1, click gesture information is sent to the input state recognition unit in the first touch module through the input touch detection unit in the first touch module, so that the input state recognition unit enters monitoring The second touch module feeds back the waiting state of the area type.
在本实施例中,第一触控模块内还配置输入状态识别单元,在触控检测到单元向第二触控模块发送了上述的光标位移事件时,会同时向上述输入状态识别单元发送一个点击手势信息,此时,输入状态识别单元会进入等待状态,以等待第二触控单元反馈点击区域的区域类型。In this embodiment, an input state recognition unit is also configured in the first touch module. When the touch detection unit sends the above-mentioned cursor displacement event to the second touch module, it will simultaneously send an input state recognition unit to the above-mentioned cursor displacement event. Click gesture information, at this time, the input state recognition unit will enter a waiting state to wait for the second touch unit to feedback the area type of the click area.
在S1804.2中,通过所述光标分类单元将所述区域类型反馈给所述第一触控模块。In S1804.2, the area type is fed back to the first touch module through the cursor classification unit.
在S1804.3中,通过所述输入状态识别单元接收所述第二触控模块反馈的所述区域类型,并在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,通过所述输入状态识别模块开启所述软键盘。In S1804.3, the input state identification unit receives the area type fed back by the second touch module, and when it is detected that the area type is an editable area type, the input state identification unit Open the soft keyboard.
在本实施例中,在第二触控模块内的光标分类单元确定得到对应的区域类型后,可以反馈给上述的输入状态识别单元,上述输入状态识别单元由于一直处于监听状态,在接收到上述输入状态识别单元反馈的区域类型后,可以根据区域类型的不同执行不同的操作。In this embodiment, after the cursor classification unit in the second touch module determines the corresponding area type, it can feed back to the above-mentioned input state recognition unit. Since the above-mentioned input state recognition unit is always in a listening state, after receiving the above-mentioned After inputting the area type fed back by the status recognition unit, different operations can be performed according to the area type.
在本实施例中,上述输入状态识别单元确定用户点击的区域为可编辑区域,因此会开启软键盘,以便用户进行文本输入的操作。In this embodiment, the input state recognition unit determines that the area clicked by the user is an editable area, and therefore opens the soft keyboard so that the user can perform text input operations.
在本申请实施例中,通过输入状态识别单元接收第二触控模块反馈的区域类型,能够实现单元间的逻辑分工,提高了响应操作的准确性。In the embodiment of the present application, by receiving the area type fed back by the second touch module through the input state recognition unit, logical division of labor between units can be realized, and the accuracy of the response operation can be improved.
进一步地,作为本申请的另一实施例,在S1802之后,还包括:Further, as another embodiment of the present application, after S1802, it also includes:
在S1805中,在检测到所述区域类型为非编辑区域类型时,通过所述第一触控模块不开启所述软键盘。In S1805, when it is detected that the area type is a non-editing area type, the soft keyboard is not opened through the first touch module.
在本实施例中,若上述区域类型为非编辑区域类型时,则表示用户无需对该区域进行文本输入,此时可以通过第一触控模块关闭内置的软键盘。In this embodiment, if the above-mentioned area type is a non-editing area type, it means that the user does not need to input text in this area. At this time, the built-in soft keyboard can be closed through the first touch module.
示例性地,图21示出了本申请一实施例提供的软键盘关闭的示意图。参见图21所示,图21中的(a)所示,用户原本选择的区域为可编辑区域211,此时第一触控模块可以开启软键盘方便用户进行输入,而在用户点击上述的插入控件212后,由于该插入控件对应的区域为非编辑区域,此时,第一触控模块会关闭上述的软键盘,并打开插入控件对应的控制菜单213,如图21中的(b)。Exemplarily, FIG. 21 shows a schematic diagram of closing the soft keyboard provided by an embodiment of the present application. Referring to Figure 21, as shown in (a) of Figure 21, the area originally selected by the user is the editable area 211. At this time, the first touch module can open the soft keyboard to facilitate the user's input, and when the user clicks the above insert After the control 212 is inserted, since the area corresponding to the inserted control is a non-editing area, at this time, the first touch module will close the above-mentioned soft keyboard and open the control menu 213 corresponding to the inserted control, as shown in (b) of Figure 21 .
在一种可能的实现方式中,若用户在第一操作系统内发起上述第三触控操作时,已开启软键盘,则在接收到第三触控操作后,则继续保持上述软键盘处于关闭状态。In a possible implementation, if the user has turned on the soft keyboard when initiating the third touch operation in the first operating system, after receiving the third touch operation, the soft keyboard continues to be closed. state.
在一种可能的实现方式中,在输入状态识别单元确定用户点击的区域为非编辑区域时,则关闭软键盘,避免软键盘遮挡其他的显示内容。In one possible implementation, when the input state recognition unit determines that the area clicked by the user is a non-editing area, the soft keyboard is closed to prevent the soft keyboard from blocking other displayed content.
在本申请实施例中,通过识别用户点击的类型是否为可编辑区域,以判断是否开启软键盘,避免因不同操作系统间输入方式不同,而导致在对跨系统的应用进行操作时,无法自动开启软键盘的情况发生,提高了跨系统应用操作的准确性。In this embodiment of the present application, it is determined whether to enable the soft keyboard by identifying whether the type of user click is an editable area, so as to avoid the inability to automatically operate cross-system applications due to different input methods between different operating systems. The soft keyboard is turned on, which improves the accuracy of cross-system application operations.
实施例三:Embodiment three:
对应于上文实施例所述的触控输入的方法,图22示出了本申请实施例提供的触控输入的系统的结构框图,为了便于说明,仅示出了与本申请实施例相关的部分。Corresponding to the touch input method described in the above embodiment, FIG. 22 shows a structural block diagram of the touch input system provided by the embodiment of the present application. For convenience of explanation, only the parts related to the embodiment of the present application are shown. part.
参照图22,该触控输入的系统,所述触控输入的系统包含第一操作系统以及第二操作系统;所述第一操作系统221与所述第二操作系统222不同;Referring to Figure 22, the touch input system includes a first operating system and a second operating system; the first operating system 221 and the second operating system 222 are different;
所述第一操作系统221包括: The first operating system 221 includes:
触控操作接收模块2211,用于接收用户对所述第一操作系统中的预设应用的触控操作;所述预设应用是基于所述第二操作系统搭建的;The touch operation receiving module 2211 is used to receive the user's touch operation on the preset application in the first operating system; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
第一触控模块2212,用于响应于触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统内的第二触控模块;The first touch module 2212 is configured to respond to the touch operation and send the touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second touch module in the second operating system;
所述第二操作系统222包括:The second operating system 222 includes:
所述第二触控模块2221,用于生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令;The second touch module 2221 is used to generate operation instructions corresponding to the touch event;
操作指令执行模块2222,用于通过所述预设应用执行所述操作指令。The operation instruction execution module 2222 is used to execute the operation instruction through the preset application.
可选地,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的触控操作、多触点类型的触控操作或对于所述预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作。Optionally, the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application.
可选地,所述第一操作系统221以及所述第二操作系统222为以下任一一种操作系统:安卓操作系统、鸿蒙操作系统、Linux操作系统以及windows操作系统。Optionally, the first operating system 221 and the second operating system 222 are any one of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system, and windows operating system.
可选地,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的第一触控操作;Optionally, the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type;
所述第一触控模块2212具体用于:确定目标窗口的窗口类型,并根据所述窗口类型生成所述第一触控操作对应的第一触控事件;所述目标窗口为所述第一触控操作在所述预设应用中操作的窗口;所述第一触控事件包括:所述目标窗口的窗口类型以及所述第一触控操作对应的操作类型;The first touch module 2212 is specifically configured to: determine the window type of the target window, and generate a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first Touch operation is performed on the window operated in the preset application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation;
所述第二触控模块2221还包括窗口管理单元;The second touch module 2221 also includes a window management unit;
所述窗口管理单元,用于生成对于所述目标窗口的第一操作指令。The window management unit is used to generate a first operation instruction for the target window.
可选地,所述窗口类型包括父窗口类型以及子窗口类型,操作类型包括关闭窗口、退出应用以及进行应用管理。Optionally, the window type includes a parent window type and a child window type, and the operation types include closing the window, exiting the application, and performing application management.
可选地,所述第一触控模块2212还包括:触控管理单元以及触控窗口管理单元;Optionally, the first touch module 2212 also includes: a touch management unit and a touch window management unit;
所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作,并在识别得到所述触控操作为第一触控操作时,将所述第一触控操作发送给所述触控窗口管理单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when the touch operation is recognized as a first touch operation, send the first touch operation to the Touch window management unit;
所述触控窗口管理单元,用于建立所述预设应用中各个操作窗口的级联关系;The touch window management unit is used to establish a cascade relationship between each operation window in the preset application;
所述触控窗口管理单元,还用于根据所述第一触控操作确定所述目标窗口的窗口类型。The touch window management unit is also configured to determine the window type of the target window according to the first touch operation.
可选地,所述触控操作为多触点类型的第二触控操作;Optionally, the touch operation is a second touch operation of a multi-contact type;
所述第一触控模块2212具体用于:生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块;所述多点触控事件包括在所述第一操作系统内各个所述触点的第一触控坐标以及触控时间;The first touch module 2212 is specifically configured to: generate a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation, and transmit the multi-touch event to the third operating system in the second operating system. Two touch modules; the multi-touch event includes the first touch coordinates and touch time of each touch point in the first operating system;
所述第二触控模块2221具体用于:对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令。The second touch module 2221 is specifically configured to perform coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
可选地,所述第一触控模块2212包括:触控管理单元、触控事件转换单元;Optionally, the first touch module 2212 includes: a touch management unit and a touch event conversion unit;
所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的触控操作,并在检测到所述触控操作为所述第二触控操作时将所述第二触控操作发送给所述触控事件转换单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is the second touch operation, send the second touch operation to the touch screen. Control event conversion unit;
所述触控事件转换单元,用于对所述第二触控操作进行合法校验;The touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the second touch operation;
所述触控事件转换单元,还用于若识别得到所述第二触控操作通过所述合法校验,则生成所述多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块。The touch event conversion unit is also configured to generate the multi-touch event if it is recognized that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, and send the multi-touch event to all The second touch module in the second operating system.
可选地,所述第二触控模块2221包括:多点触控管理单元以及触控窗口转换单元;Optionally, the second touch module 2221 includes: a multi-touch management unit and a touch window conversion unit;
所述多点触控管理单元,用于对所述多点触控事件进行完整校验,并在识别到所述多点触控事件通过完整校验时,将所述多点触控事件发送给所述触控窗口转换单元;The multi-touch management unit is used to complete verification of the multi-touch event, and when it is recognized that the multi-touch event passes the complete verification, send the multi-touch event. to the touch window conversion unit;
所述触控窗口转换单元,用于对所述多点触控事件内的各个所述触点进行坐标转换,确定各个所述第一触控坐标在第二操作系统中对应的第二触控坐标;所述第二触控坐标是根据在所述第一操作系统中所述预设应用的第一窗口的尺寸、所述预设应用在所述第二操作系统中对应的第二窗口的尺寸以及所述第一触控坐标确定的;所述第一窗口是为所述第二窗口在所述第一操作系统下的映射窗口;The touch window conversion unit is used to perform coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event, and determine the second touch corresponding to each of the first touch coordinates in the second operating system. Coordinates; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system and the corresponding second window of the preset application in the second operating system. The size and the first touch coordinates are determined; the first window is a mapping window for the second window under the first operating system;
所述触控窗口转换单元,还用于根据所述第二触控坐标生成所述第二操作指令。The touch window conversion unit is also used to generate the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
可选地,所述控窗口转换单元还用于:Optionally, the control window conversion unit is also used for:
确定所述预设应用中所需操作的目标窗口,并基于所述第二触点坐标生成作用于所述目标窗 口的第二操作指令。Determine the target window for the required operation in the preset application, and generate a target window based on the second contact point coordinates. The second operation command of the mouth.
可选地,所述触控操作为对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作;Optionally, the touch operation is a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application;
所述第一触控模块2212具体用于:生成所述第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件,并将所述光标位移触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块;所述光标位移触控事件包含有所述触控操作对应的第三触控坐标;The first touch module 2212 is specifically configured to: generate a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and send the cursor displacement touch event to the third operating system in the second operating system. Two touch modules; the cursor displacement touch event includes the third touch coordinate corresponding to the touch operation;
所述第二触控模块2221具体用于:识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令;The second touch module 2221 is specifically configured to: identify the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generate a third operation instruction according to the area type;
所述第二触控模块2221还用于:将所述区域类型发送给所述第一操作系统中的所述第一触控模块;The second touch module 2221 is also used to: send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system;
所述第一触控模块2212还用于:在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启软键盘。The first touch module 2212 is also configured to enable the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is an editable area type.
可选地,所述第一触控模块2212还用于:在检测到所述区域类型为非编辑区域类型时,不开启所述软键盘。Optionally, the first touch module 2212 is also configured to not open the soft keyboard when it is detected that the area type is a non-editing area type.
可选地,所述第一触控模块2212包括:触控管理单元、触控事件转换单元以及输入触控检测单元;Optionally, the first touch module 2212 includes: a touch management unit, a touch event conversion unit, and an input touch detection unit;
所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作,并在检测到所述触控操作为第三触控操作时,将所述第三触控操作发送给所述触控事件转换单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is a third touch operation, send the third touch operation to the Touch event conversion unit;
所述触控事件转换单元,用于对所述第三触控操作进行合法校验,并在检测到所述第三触控操作通过所述合法校验时,向所述输入触控检测单元发送基于所述第三触控操作生成的点击识别事件;The touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the third touch operation, and when it is detected that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, the input touch detection unit Send a click recognition event generated based on the third touch operation;
所述输入触控检测单元,用于响应于所述点击识别事件,识别所述第三触控操作对应的点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标,并将基于所述点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标生成的光标位移事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块。The input touch detection unit is configured to, in response to the click recognition event, identify the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determine the click type and the third touch coordinate based on the click type and the third touch coordinate. The cursor displacement event generated by the three touch coordinates is sent to the second touch module in the second operating system.
可选地,所述第一触控模块2212还包括:输入状态识别单元;Optionally, the first touch module 2212 further includes: an input state recognition unit;
所述输入触控检测单元还用于:向所述第一触控模块内的输入状态识别单元发送点击手势信息,以使所述输入状态识别单元进入监听所述第二触控模块反馈所述区域类型的等待状态;The input touch detection unit is also configured to send click gesture information to the input state recognition unit in the first touch module, so that the input state recognition unit monitors the feedback from the second touch module. Waiting states for zone types;
所述输入状态识别单元,用于接收所述第二触控模块反馈的所述区域类型,并在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启所述软键盘。The input state recognition unit is configured to receive the area type fed back by the second touch module, and when detecting that the area type is an editable area type, enable the soft keyboard.
可选地,所述第二触控模块2221包括:点击输入子单元以及光标分类单元;Optionally, the second touch module 2221 includes: a click input subunit and a cursor classification unit;
所述点击输入子单元,用于接收所述第一操作系统的所述第一触控模块发送的所述光标位移事件,并将所述第二操作系统内的虚拟光标更新至所述第三触控坐标;The click input subunit is configured to receive the cursor displacement event sent by the first touch module of the first operating system, and update the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third Touch coordinates;
所述光标分类单元,用于识别更新至所述第三触控坐标时所述虚拟光标的光标样式,并基于所述光标样式确定所述第三触控坐标对应的区域类型;The cursor classification unit is used to identify the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determine the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style;
所述光标分类单元,还用于将所述区域类型发送给所述第一操作系统内的所述第一触控模块。The cursor classification unit is also used to send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system.
可选地,所述第一操作系统包括:启动操作接收单元、应用启动单元以及界面显示单元;所述第二操作系统包括:界面反馈单元;Optionally, the first operating system includes: a startup operation receiving unit, an application startup unit, and an interface display unit; the second operating system includes: an interface feedback unit;
启动操作接收单元,用于接收用户在所述第一操作系统中发起对于所述预设应用的启动操作;A startup operation receiving unit configured to receive a user's startup operation for the preset application in the first operating system;
应用启动单元,用于通过安装于所述第一操作系统中的代理应用向所述第二操作系统发起应用启动指令;所述应用启动指令携带有所述预设应用的应用标识;An application startup unit configured to initiate an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
界面反馈单元,用于响应所述应用启动指令,在所述第二操作系统内运行所述预设应用,并将所述预设应用的操作界面反馈给所述代理应用;An interface feedback unit, configured to respond to the application startup instruction, run the preset application in the second operating system, and feed back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application;
界面显示单元,用于通过所述代理应用在所述第一操作系统内生成所述操作界面。An interface display unit is configured to generate the operation interface in the first operating system through the proxy application.
因此,本申请实施例提供的触控输入的装置同样可以通过在第一操作系统中运行跨操作系统的预设应用,在用户在第一操作系统发起对于预设应用的触控操作时,可以通过第一操作系统的第一触控模块生成对应的触控事件,并传输给运行有第二操作系统的容器中部署的第二触控模块,通过第二触控模块对触控事件进行转换,生成能够被第二操作系统识别的操作指令,从而运行于第二操作系统内的预设应用对操作指令进行响应,生成与之对应的响应结果,实现了对跨系统间的触控操作的互通。与现有的设备控制技术相比,本申请实施例中通过在不同的操作系统内配置 对应的触控模块,通过触控模块对触控操作进行跨系统的转换,从而能够生成支持跨系统运行的预设应用识别的操作指令,提高了跨系统操作的一致性,从而提高了对于操作系统内的应用生态的扩展,满足了用户的使用需求。Therefore, the touch input device provided by the embodiment of the present application can also run a preset application across operating systems in the first operating system. When the user initiates a touch operation for the preset application in the first operating system, the device can The corresponding touch event is generated by the first touch module of the first operating system and transmitted to the second touch module deployed in the container running the second operating system, and the touch event is converted by the second touch module , generate an operation instruction that can be recognized by the second operating system, so that the preset application running in the second operating system responds to the operation instruction and generates a corresponding response result, realizing the control of touch operations across systems. Interoperability. Compared with existing device control technology, in the embodiment of this application, by configuring in different operating systems The corresponding touch module converts touch operations across systems through the touch module, thereby generating operation instructions that support preset application recognition for cross-system operation, improving the consistency of cross-system operations, and thus improving the operational efficiency. The expansion of the application ecosystem within the system meets the needs of users.
图23为本申请一实施例提供的电子设备的结构示意图。如图23所示,该实施例的电子设备23包括:至少一个处理器230(图23中仅示出一个处理器)、存储器231以及存储在所述存储器231中并可在所述至少一个处理器230上运行的计算机程序232,所述处理器230执行所述计算机程序232时实现上述任意各个触控输入的方法实施例中的步骤。Figure 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Fig. 23, the electronic device 23 of this embodiment includes: at least one processor 230 (only one processor is shown in Fig. 23), a memory 231, and a device stored in the memory 231 and capable of processing in the at least one processor 230. The computer program 232 runs on the processor 230. When the processor 230 executes the computer program 232, the steps in any of the above touch input method embodiments are implemented.
所述电子设备23可以是桌上型计算机、笔记本、掌上电脑及云端服务器等计算设备。该电子设备可包括,但不仅限于,处理器230、存储器231。本领域技术人员可以理解,图23仅仅是电子设备23的举例,并不构成对电子设备23的限定,可以包括比图示更多或更少的部件,或者组合某些部件,或者不同的部件,例如还可以包括输入输出设备、网络接入设备等。The electronic device 23 may be a computing device such as a desktop computer, a notebook, a PDA, a cloud server, etc. The electronic device may include, but is not limited to, a processor 230 and a memory 231. Those skilled in the art can understand that FIG. 23 is only an example of the electronic device 23 and does not constitute a limitation on the electronic device 23. It may include more or fewer components than shown in the figure, or some components may be combined, or different components may be used. , for example, it may also include input and output devices, network access devices, etc.
所称处理器230可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit,CPU),该处理器230还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(Digital Signal Processor,DSP)、专用集成电路(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(Field-Programmable Gate Array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。The so-called processor 230 can be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, CPU). The processor 230 can also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (Digital Signal Processor, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (Application Specific Integrated Circuit). , ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (Field-Programmable Gate Array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gate or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc. A general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may be any conventional processor, etc.
所述存储器231在一些实施例中可以是所述电子设备23的内部存储单元,例如电子设备23的硬盘或内存。所述存储器231在另一些实施例中也可以是所述电子设备23的外部存储设备,例如所述电子设备23上配备的插接式硬盘,智能存储卡(Smart Media Card,SMC),安全数字(Secure Digital,SD)卡,闪存卡(Flash Card)等。进一步地,所述存储器231还可以既包括所述电子设备23的内部存储单元也包括外部存储设备。所述存储器231用于存储操作系统、应用程序、引导装载程序(BootLoader)、数据以及其他程序等,例如所述计算机程序的程序代码等。所述存储器231还可以用于暂时地存储已经输出或者将要输出的数据。The memory 231 may be an internal storage unit of the electronic device 23 in some embodiments, such as a hard disk or memory of the electronic device 23 . In other embodiments, the memory 231 may also be an external storage device of the electronic device 23, such as a plug-in hard disk, a smart memory card (Smart Media Card, SMC), or a secure digital card equipped on the electronic device 23. (Secure Digital, SD) card, flash card (Flash Card), etc. Further, the memory 231 may also include both an internal storage unit of the electronic device 23 and an external storage device. The memory 231 is used to store operating systems, application programs, boot loaders (Boot Loaders), data, and other programs, such as program codes of the computer programs. The memory 231 can also be used to temporarily store data that has been output or is to be output.
需要说明的是,上述装置/单元之间的信息交互、执行过程等内容,由于与本申请方法实施例基于同一构思,其具体功能及带来的技术效果,具体可参见方法实施例部分,此处不再赘述。It should be noted that the information interaction, execution process, etc. between the above-mentioned devices/units are based on the same concept as the method embodiments of the present application. For details of their specific functions and technical effects, please refer to the method embodiments section. No further details will be given.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到,为了描述的方便和简洁,仅以上述各功能单元、模块的划分进行举例说明,实际应用中,可以根据需要而将上述功能分配由不同的功能单元、模块完成,即将所述装置的内部结构划分成不同的功能单元或模块,以完成以上描述的全部或者部分功能。实施例中的各功能单元、模块可以集成在一个处理单元中,也可以是各个单元单独物理存在,也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中,上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现,也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。另外,各功能单元、模块的具体名称也只是为了便于相互区分,并不用于限制本申请的保护范围。上述系统中单元、模块的具体工作过程,可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应过程,在此不再赘述。Those skilled in the art can clearly understand that for the convenience and simplicity of description, only the division of the above functional units and modules is used as an example. In actual applications, the above functions can be allocated to different functional units and modules according to needs. Module completion means dividing the internal structure of the device into different functional units or modules to complete all or part of the functions described above. Each functional unit and module in the embodiment can be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit can exist physically alone, or two or more units can be integrated into one unit. The above-mentioned integrated unit can be hardware-based. It can also be implemented in the form of software functional units. In addition, the specific names of each functional unit and module are only for the convenience of distinguishing each other and are not used to limit the scope of protection of the present application. For the specific working processes of the units and modules in the above system, please refer to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and will not be described again here.
本申请实施例还提供了一种电子设备,该电子设备包括:至少一个处理器、存储器以及存储在所述存储器中并可在所述至少一个处理器上运行的计算机程序,所述处理器执行所述计算机程序时实现上述任意各个方法实施例中的步骤。An embodiment of the present application also provides an electronic device. The electronic device includes: at least one processor, a memory, and a computer program stored in the memory and executable on the at least one processor. The processor executes The computer program implements the steps in any of the above method embodiments.
本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现可实现上述各个方法实施例中的步骤。Embodiments of the present application also provide a computer-readable storage medium. The computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program. When the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps in each of the above method embodiments can be implemented.
本申请实施例提供了一种计算机程序产品,当计算机程序产品在移动终端上运行时,使得移动终端执行时实现可实现上述各个方法实施例中的步骤。Embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product. When the computer program product is run on a mobile terminal, the steps in each of the above method embodiments can be implemented when the mobile terminal is executed.
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时,可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解,本申请实现上述实施例方法中的全部或部分流程,可以通过计算机程序来指令相关的硬件来完成,所述的计算机程序可存储于一计算机可读存储介质中,该计算机程序在被处理器执行时,可实现上述各个方法实施例的步骤。其中,所述计算机程序包括计算机程序代码,所述计算机程序代码可以为源代码形式、对象代码形式、可执行文件或某些中间形式等。所述计算机可读介质至少可以包括:能够将计算机程序代码携带到拍照装置/电子设备的任何实体或装置、记录介质、计算机存储器、只读存储器(ROM,Read-Only  Memory)、随机存取存储器(RAM,Random Access Memory)、电载波信号、电信信号以及软件分发介质。例如U盘、移动硬盘、磁碟或者光盘等。在某些司法管辖区,根据立法和专利实践,计算机可读介质不可以是电载波信号和电信信号。If the integrated unit is implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, it may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. Based on this understanding, this application can implement all or part of the processes in the methods of the above embodiments by instructing relevant hardware through a computer program. The computer program can be stored in a computer-readable storage medium. The computer program When executed by a processor, the steps of each of the above method embodiments may be implemented. Wherein, the computer program includes computer program code, which may be in the form of source code, object code, executable file or some intermediate form. The computer-readable medium may at least include: any entity or device capable of carrying computer program code to a camera/electronic device, a recording medium, a computer memory, a read-only memory (ROM, Read-Only Memory), random access memory (RAM, Random Access Memory), electrical carrier signals, telecommunications signals, and software distribution media. For example, U disk, mobile hard disk, magnetic disk or CD, etc. In some jurisdictions, subject to legislation and patent practice, computer-readable media may not be electrical carrier signals and telecommunications signals.
在上述实施例中,对各个实施例的描述都各有侧重,某个实施例中没有详述或记载的部分,可以参见其它实施例的相关描述。In the above embodiments, each embodiment is described with its own emphasis. For parts that are not detailed or documented in a certain embodiment, please refer to the relevant descriptions of other embodiments.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到,结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各示例的单元及算法步骤,能够以电子硬件、或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结合来实现。这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行,取决于技术方案的特定应用和设计约束条件。专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方法来实现所描述的功能,但是这种实现不应认为超出本申请的范围。Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the units and algorithm steps of each example described in conjunction with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented with electronic hardware, or a combination of computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the technical solution. Skilled artisans may implement the described functionality using different methods for each specific application, but such implementations should not be considered beyond the scope of this application.
在本申请所提供的实施例中,应该理解到,所揭露的装置/网络设备和方法,可以通过其它的方式实现。例如,以上所描述的装置/网络设备实施例仅仅是示意性的,例如,所述模块或单元的划分,仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分,实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式,例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个系统,或一些特征可以忽略,或不执行。另一点,所显示或讨论的相互之间的耦合或直接耦合或通讯连接可以是通过一些接口,装置或单元的间接耦合或通讯连接,可以是电性,机械或其它的形式。In the embodiments provided in this application, it should be understood that the disclosed devices/network devices and methods can be implemented in other ways. For example, the apparatus/network equipment embodiments described above are only illustrative. For example, the division of modules or units is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be other division methods, such as multiple units. Or components can be combined or can be integrated into another system, or some features can be omitted, or not implemented. On the other hand, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection between each other shown or discussed may be through some interfaces, indirect coupling or communication connection of devices or units, which may be in electrical, mechanical or other forms.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元,即可以位于一个地方,或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components shown as units may or may not be physical units, that is, they may be located in one place, or they may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units can be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of this embodiment.
以上所述实施例仅用以说明本申请的技术方案,而非对其限制;尽管参照前述实施例对本申请进行了详细的说明,本领域的普通技术人员应当理解:其依然可以对前述各实施例所记载的技术方案进行修改,或者对其中部分技术特征进行等同替换;而这些修改或者替换,并不使相应技术方案的本质脱离本申请各实施例技术方案的精神和范围,均应包含在本申请的保护范围之内。 The above-described embodiments are only used to illustrate the technical solutions of the present application, but not to limit them; although the present application has been described in detail with reference to the foregoing embodiments, those of ordinary skill in the art should understand that they can still implement the above-mentioned implementations. The technical solutions described in the examples are modified, or some of the technical features are equivalently replaced; and these modifications or substitutions do not cause the essence of the corresponding technical solutions to deviate from the spirit and scope of the technical solutions in the embodiments of this application, and should be included in within the protection scope of this application.

Claims (32)

  1. 一种触控输入的方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于电子设备,所述电子设备同时搭载有第一操作系统以及第二操作系统,所述第一操作系统与所述第二操作系统不同;A touch input method, characterized in that the method is applied to an electronic device, the electronic device is equipped with a first operating system and a second operating system at the same time, the first operating system and the second operating system are different;
    所述方法包括:The methods include:
    所述第一操作系统接收用户对预设应用的触控操作;所述预设应用是基于所述第二操作系统搭建的;The first operating system receives a user's touch operation on a preset application; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
    所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统;The first operating system responds to the touch operation and sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system;
    所述第二操作系统生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令;The second operating system generates an operation instruction corresponding to the touch event;
    所述第二操作系统通过所述预设应用执行所述操作指令。The second operating system executes the operation instruction through the preset application.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一操作系统以及所述第二操作系统为以下任一一种操作系统:安卓操作系统、鸿蒙操作系统、Linux操作系统或windows操作系统。The method according to claim 1, characterized in that the first operating system and the second operating system are any one of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system. .
  3. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,其特征在于,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的触控操作、多触点类型的触控操作或对于所述预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作。The method of claim 1, wherein the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third click on any area in the preset application. Three-touch operation.
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的第一触控操作;The method of claim 3, wherein the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type;
    所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统,包括:In response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
    第一操作系统确定目标窗口的窗口类型,并根据所述窗口类型生成所述第一触控操作对应的第一触控事件;所述目标窗口为所述第一触控操作在所述预设应用中操作的窗口;所述第一触控事件包括:所述目标窗口的窗口类型以及所述第一触控操作对应的操作类型。The first operating system determines the window type of the target window, and generates a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first touch operation in the preset time. The window operated in the application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation.
  5. 根据权利要求4所述的方法,其特征在于,所述窗口类型为父窗口类型或子窗口类型,操作类型为关闭窗口、退出应用或进行应用管理。The method according to claim 4, characterized in that the window type is a parent window type or a child window type, and the operation type is closing the window, exiting the application or performing application management.
  6. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述触控操作为多触点类型的第二触控操作;The method according to claim 3, wherein the touch operation is a second touch operation of a multi-contact type;
    所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统,包括:In response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
    所述第一操作系统生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二操作系统;所述多点触控事件包括在所述第一操作系统内各个所述触点的第一触控坐标以及触控时间;The first operating system generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation and transmits the multi-touch event to the second operating system; the multi-touch event is included in the The first touch coordinates and touch time of each contact point in the first operating system;
    所述通过所述第一触控模块将所述触控事件发送给运行有所述第二操作系统的容器内的第二触控模块,并通过所述第二触控模块生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令,包括:The first touch module sends the touch event to the second touch module in the container running the second operating system, and the second touch module generates the touch event. The operation instructions corresponding to the event include:
    所述第二操作系统对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令。The second operating system performs coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一操作系统生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二触控模块,包括:The method of claim 6, wherein the first operating system generates a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation and transmits the multi-touch event to the second Touch module, including:
    所述第一操作系统监听所述用户发起的触控操作;The first operating system monitors touch operations initiated by the user;
    所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述触控操作为第二触控操作,则对所述第二触控操作进行合法校验;If the first operating system recognizes that the touch operation is a second touch operation, it performs legal verification on the second touch operation;
    所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述第二触控操作通过所述合法校验,则生成所述多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统。If the first operating system recognizes that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, it generates the multi-touch event and sends the multi-touch event to the second operating system. .
  8. 根据权利要求6所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二操作系统对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令,包括:The method according to claim 6, characterized in that the second operating system performs coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system. ,include:
    所述第二操作系统对所述多点触控事件进行完整校验;The second operating system performs complete verification on the multi-touch event;
    所述第二操作系统若识别到所述多点触控事件通过完整校验,则对所述多点触控事件内的各个所述触点进行坐标转换,确定各个所述第一触控坐标在第二操作系统中对应的第二触控坐标;所述第二触控坐标是根据在所述第一操作系统中所述预设应用的第一窗口的尺寸、所述预设应用 在所述第二操作系统中对应的第二窗口的尺寸以及所述第一触控坐标确定的;所述第一窗口是为所述第二窗口在所述第一操作系统下的映射窗口;If the second operating system recognizes that the multi-touch event passes complete verification, it performs coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event to determine each of the first touch coordinates. The corresponding second touch coordinates in the second operating system; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system, the preset application The size of the corresponding second window and the first touch coordinates are determined in the second operating system; the first window is the mapping window of the second window under the first operating system;
    所述第二操作系统根据所述第二触控坐标生成所述第二操作指令。The second operating system generates the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二操作系统根据所述第二触控坐标生成所述第二操作指令,包括:The method of claim 8, wherein the second operating system generates the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates, including:
    所述第二操作系统确定所述预设应用中所需操作的目标窗口,并基于所述第二触点坐标生成作用于所述目标窗口的第二操作指令。The second operating system determines a target window for a required operation in the preset application, and generates a second operation instruction that acts on the target window based on the second contact point coordinates.
  10. 根据权利要求3所述的方法,其特征在于,所述触控操作为对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作;The method of claim 3, wherein the touch operation is a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application;
    所述第一操作系统响应于所述触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统,包括:In response to the touch operation, the first operating system sends a touch event generated based on the touch operation to the second operating system, including:
    所述第一操作系统生成所述第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件,并将所述光标位移触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统;所述光标位移触控事件包含有所述触控操作对应的第三触控坐标;The first operating system generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and sends the cursor displacement touch event to the second operating system; the cursor displacement touch event includes The third touch coordinate corresponding to the above-mentioned touch operation;
    所述第二操作系统生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令,包括:The second operating system generates operation instructions corresponding to the touch event, including:
    所述第二操作系统识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令;The second operating system identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type;
    在所述第二操作系统生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令之后,还包括:After the second operating system generates the operation instruction corresponding to the touch event, it also includes:
    所述第一操作系统接收所述第二操作系统反馈的关于所述第三触控坐标对应的所述区域类型;The first operating system receives feedback from the second operating system regarding the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate;
    所述第一操作系统在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启软键盘。When the first operating system detects that the area type is an editable area type, the soft keyboard is enabled.
  11. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一操作系统接收所述第二操作系统反馈的关于所述第三触控坐标对应的所述区域类型之后,还包括:The method according to claim 10, characterized in that, after the first operating system receives feedback from the second operating system regarding the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate, it further includes:
    所述第一操作系统在检测到所述区域类型为非编辑区域类型时,不开启所述软键盘。The first operating system does not open the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is a non-editing area type.
  12. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一操作系统生成所述第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件,并将所述光标位移触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统,包括:The method of claim 10, wherein the first operating system generates a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation and sends the cursor displacement touch event to the second Operating system, including:
    所述第一操作系统监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作;The first operating system monitors the touch operation initiated by the user;
    所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述触控操作为第三触控操作,则对所述第三触控操作进行合法校验;If the first operating system recognizes that the touch operation is a third touch operation, it performs legal verification on the third touch operation;
    所述第一操作系统若识别得到所述第三触控操作通过所述合法校验,则生成点击识别事件;If the first operating system recognizes that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, it generates a click recognition event;
    所述第一操作系统响应于所述点击识别事件,识别所述第三触控操作对应的点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标,并将基于所述点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标生成的光标位移事件发送给所述第二操作系统。In response to the click recognition event, the first operating system identifies the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determines the click type and the third touch coordinates based on the click type and the third touch coordinates. The generated cursor displacement event is sent to the second operating system.
  13. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第二操作系统识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令,包括:The method according to claim 10, characterized in that the second operating system identifies the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generates a third operation instruction according to the area type. ,include:
    所述第二操作系统接收所述第一操作系统发送的光标位移事件,并将所述第二操作系统内的虚拟光标更新至所述第三触控坐标;The second operating system receives the cursor displacement event sent by the first operating system, and updates the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third touch coordinates;
    所述第二操作系统识别更新至所述第三触控坐标时所述虚拟光标的光标样式,并基于所述光标样式确定所述第三触控坐标对应的区域类型。The second operating system identifies the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determines the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style.
  14. 根据权利要求1-13任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,在所述第一操作系统接收用户对预设应用的触控操作,还包括:The method according to any one of claims 1 to 13, characterized in that receiving a user's touch operation on a preset application in the first operating system further includes:
    所述第一操作系统接收用户对于所述预设应用的启动操作;The first operating system receives a user's startup operation for the preset application;
    所述第一操作系统通过安装于所述第一操作系统中的代理应用向所述第二操作系统发送应用启动指令;所述应用启动指令携带有所述预设应用的应用标识;The first operating system sends an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
    所述第二操作系统响应于所述应用启动指令,运行所述预设应用,并将所述预设应用的操作界面反馈给所述第一操作系统内的所述代理应用;The second operating system responds to the application startup instruction, runs the preset application, and feeds back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application in the first operating system;
    所述第一操作系统通过所述代理应用生成所述操作界面。The first operating system generates the operation interface through the proxy application.
  15. 一种触控输入的系统,其特征在于,所述触控输入的系统包含第一操作系统以及第二操作系统;所述第一操作系统与所述第二操作系统不同; A touch input system, characterized in that the touch input system includes a first operating system and a second operating system; the first operating system and the second operating system are different;
    所述第一操作系统包括:The first operating system includes:
    触控操作接收模块,用于接收用户对所述第一操作系统中的预设应用的触控操作;所述预设应用是基于所述第二操作系统搭建的;A touch operation receiving module, configured to receive a user's touch operation on a preset application in the first operating system; the preset application is built based on the second operating system;
    第一触控模块,用于响应于触控操作,将基于所述触控操作生成的触控事件发送给第二操作系统内的第二触控模块;A first touch module, configured to respond to a touch operation and send a touch event generated based on the touch operation to a second touch module in the second operating system;
    所述第二操作系统包括:The second operating system includes:
    所述第二触控模块,用于生成所述触控事件对应的操作指令;The second touch module is used to generate operation instructions corresponding to the touch event;
    操作指令执行单元,用于通过所述预设应用执行所述操作指令。An operation instruction execution unit is used to execute the operation instruction through the preset application.
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一操作系统以及所述第二操作系统为以下任一一种操作系统:安卓操作系统、鸿蒙操作系统、Linux操作系统或windows操作系统。The system according to claim 15, wherein the first operating system and the second operating system are any one of the following operating systems: Android operating system, Hongmeng operating system, Linux operating system or windows operating system. .
  17. 根据权利要求15所述的系统,其特征在于,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的触控操作、多触点类型的触控操作或对于所述预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作。The system of claim 15, wherein the touch operation is an edge gesture type touch operation, a multi-touch point type touch operation, or a third click on any area in the preset application. Three-touch operation.
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的系统,其特征在于,所述触控操作为边缘手势类型的第一触控操作;The system according to claim 17, wherein the touch operation is a first touch operation of an edge gesture type;
    所述第一触控模块具体用于:确定目标窗口的窗口类型,并根据所述窗口类型生成所述第一触控操作对应的第一触控事件;所述目标窗口为所述第一触控操作在所述预设应用中操作的窗口;所述第一触控事件包括:所述目标窗口的窗口类型以及所述第一触控操作对应的操作类型;The first touch module is specifically configured to: determine a window type of a target window, and generate a first touch event corresponding to the first touch operation according to the window type; the target window is the first touch event. Control the window operated in the preset application; the first touch event includes: the window type of the target window and the operation type corresponding to the first touch operation;
    所述第二触控模块还包括窗口管理单元;The second touch module also includes a window management unit;
    所述窗口管理单元,用于生成对于所述目标窗口的第一操作指令。The window management unit is used to generate a first operation instruction for the target window.
  19. 根据权利要求18所述的系统,其特征在于,所述窗口类型为父窗口类型或子窗口类型,操作类型为关闭窗口、退出应用或进行应用管理。The system according to claim 18, characterized in that the window type is a parent window type or a child window type, and the operation type is closing the window, exiting the application or performing application management.
  20. 根据权利要求19所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一触控模块还包括:触控管理单元以及触控窗口管理单元;The system according to claim 19, wherein the first touch module further includes: a touch management unit and a touch window management unit;
    所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作,并在识别得到所述触控操作为第一触控操作时,将所述第一触控操作发送给所述触控窗口管理单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when the touch operation is recognized as a first touch operation, send the first touch operation to the Touch window management unit;
    所述触控窗口管理单元,用于建立所述预设应用中各个操作窗口的级联关系;The touch window management unit is used to establish a cascade relationship between each operation window in the preset application;
    所述触控窗口管理单元,还用于根据所述第一触控操作确定所述目标窗口的窗口类型。The touch window management unit is also configured to determine the window type of the target window according to the first touch operation.
  21. 根据权利要求17所述的系统,其特征在于,所述触控操作为多触点类型的第二触控操作;The system according to claim 17, wherein the touch operation is a second touch operation of a multi-contact type;
    所述第一触控模块具体用于:生成所述第二触控操作对应的多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件传输给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块;所述多点触控事件包括在所述第一操作系统内各个所述触点的第一触控坐标以及触控时间;The first touch module is specifically configured to: generate a multi-touch event corresponding to the second touch operation, and transmit the multi-touch event to the second operating system in the second operating system. Touch module; the multi-touch event includes the first touch coordinates and touch time of each touch point in the first operating system;
    所述第二触控模块具体用于:对所述多点触控事件内的各个触点进行坐标转换,得到适用于所述第二操作系统的第二操作指令。The second touch module is specifically configured to perform coordinate conversion on each touch point in the multi-touch event to obtain a second operation instruction suitable for the second operating system.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一触控模块包括:触控管理单元、触控事件转换单元;The system according to claim 21, wherein the first touch module includes: a touch management unit and a touch event conversion unit;
    所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的触控操作,并在检测到所述触控操作为所述第二触控操作时将所述第二触控操作发送给所述触控事件转换单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is the second touch operation, send the second touch operation to the touch screen. Control event conversion unit;
    所述触控事件转换单元,用于对所述第二触控操作进行合法校验;The touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the second touch operation;
    所述触控事件转换单元,还用于若识别得到所述第二触控操作通过所述合法校验,则生成所述多点触控事件,并将所述多点触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块。The touch event conversion unit is also configured to generate the multi-touch event if it is recognized that the second touch operation passes the legal verification, and send the multi-touch event to the The second touch module in the second operating system.
  23. 根据权利要求21所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第二触控模块包括:多点触控管理单元以及触控窗口转换单元;The system according to claim 21, wherein the second touch module includes: a multi-touch management unit and a touch window conversion unit;
    所述多点触控管理单元,用于对所述多点触控事件进行完整校验,并在识别到所述多点触控事件通过完整校验时,将所述多点触控事件发送给所述触控窗口转换单元;The multi-touch management unit is used to complete verification of the multi-touch event, and when it is recognized that the multi-touch event passes the complete verification, send the multi-touch event. to the touch window conversion unit;
    所述触控窗口转换单元,用于对所述多点触控事件内的各个所述触点进行坐标转换,确定各个所述第一触控坐标在第二操作系统中对应的第二触控坐标;所述第二触控坐标是根据在所述第一操作系统中所述预设应用的第一窗口的尺寸、所述预设应用在所述第二操作系统中对应的第二 窗口的尺寸以及所述第一触控坐标确定的;所述第一窗口是为所述第二窗口在所述第一操作系统下的映射窗口;The touch window conversion unit is used to perform coordinate conversion on each of the touch points in the multi-touch event, and determine the second touch corresponding to each of the first touch coordinates in the second operating system. coordinates; the second touch coordinates are based on the size of the first window of the preset application in the first operating system and the second corresponding second window of the preset application in the second operating system. The size of the window and the first touch coordinates are determined; the first window is a mapping window for the second window under the first operating system;
    所述触控窗口转换单元,还用于根据所述第二触控坐标生成所述第二操作指令。The touch window conversion unit is also used to generate the second operation instruction according to the second touch coordinates.
  24. 根据权利要求23所述的系统,其特征在于,所述控窗口转换单元还用于:The system according to claim 23, characterized in that the control window conversion unit is also used for:
    确定所述预设应用中所需操作的目标窗口,并基于所述第二触点坐标生成作用于所述目标窗口的第二操作指令。Determine a target window for a required operation in the preset application, and generate a second operation instruction that acts on the target window based on the second contact point coordinates.
  25. 根据权利要求17所述的系统,其特征在于,所述触控操作包括对于预设应用中任一区域进行点击的第三触控操作;The system according to claim 17, wherein the touch operation includes a third touch operation of clicking on any area in the preset application;
    所述第一触控模块具体用于:生成所述第三触控操作对应的光标位移触控事件,并将所述光标位移触控事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块;所述光标位移触控事件包含有所述触控操作对应的第三触控坐标;The first touch module is specifically configured to: generate a cursor displacement touch event corresponding to the third touch operation, and send the cursor displacement touch event to the second operating system in the second operating system. Touch module; the cursor displacement touch event includes the third touch coordinate corresponding to the touch operation;
    所述第二触控模块具体用于:识别所述第三触控坐标在所述预设应用内对应的区域类型,并根据所述区域类型生成第三操作指令;The second touch module is specifically configured to: identify the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinate in the preset application, and generate a third operation instruction according to the area type;
    所述第二触控模块还用于:将所述区域类型发送给所述第一操作系统中的所述第一触控模块;The second touch module is also configured to: send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system;
    所述第一触控模块还用于:在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启软键盘。The first touch module is also configured to enable the soft keyboard when detecting that the area type is an editable area type.
  26. 根据权利要求25所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一触控模块还用于:在检测到所述区域类型为非编辑区域类型时,不开启所述软键盘。The system according to claim 25, wherein the first touch module is further configured to not open the soft keyboard when it is detected that the area type is a non-editing area type.
  27. 根据权利要求25所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一触控模块包括:触控管理单元、触控事件转换单元以及输入触控检测单元;The system according to claim 25, wherein the first touch module includes: a touch management unit, a touch event conversion unit and an input touch detection unit;
    所述触控管理单元,用于监听所述用户发起的所述触控操作,并在检测到所述触控操作为第三触控操作时,将所述第三触控操作发送给所述触控事件转换单元;The touch management unit is configured to monitor the touch operation initiated by the user, and when detecting that the touch operation is a third touch operation, send the third touch operation to the Touch event conversion unit;
    所述触控事件转换单元,用于对所述第三触控操作进行合法校验,并在检测到所述第三触控操作通过所述合法校验时,向所述输入触控检测单元发送基于所述第三触控操作生成的点击识别事件;The touch event conversion unit is used to perform legal verification on the third touch operation, and when it is detected that the third touch operation passes the legal verification, the input touch detection unit Send a click recognition event generated based on the third touch operation;
    所述输入触控检测单元,用于响应于所述点击识别事件,识别所述第三触控操作对应的点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标,并将基于所述点击类型以及所述第三触控坐标生成的光标位移事件发送给所述第二操作系统中的所述第二触控模块。The input touch detection unit is configured to, in response to the click recognition event, identify the click type corresponding to the third touch operation and the third touch coordinates, and determine the click type and the third touch coordinate based on the click type and the third touch coordinate. The cursor displacement event generated by the three touch coordinates is sent to the second touch module in the second operating system.
  28. 根据权利要求27所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一触控模块还包括:输入状态识别单元;The system according to claim 27, wherein the first touch module further includes: an input state recognition unit;
    所述输入触控检测单元还用于:向所述第一触控模块内的输入状态识别单元发送点击手势信息,以使所述输入状态识别单元进入监听所述第二触控模块反馈所述区域类型的等待状态;The input touch detection unit is also configured to send click gesture information to the input state recognition unit in the first touch module, so that the input state recognition unit monitors the feedback from the second touch module. Area type wait states;
    所述输入状态识别单元,用于接收所述第二触控模块反馈的所述区域类型,并在检测到所述区域类型为可编辑区域类型时,开启所述软键盘。The input state recognition unit is configured to receive the area type fed back by the second touch module, and when detecting that the area type is an editable area type, enable the soft keyboard.
  29. 根据权利要求25所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第二触控模块包括:点击输入子单元以及光标分类单元;The system according to claim 25, wherein the second touch module includes: a click input subunit and a cursor classification unit;
    所述点击输入子单元,用于接收所述第一操作系统的所述第一触控模块发送的所述光标位移事件,并将所述第二操作系统内的虚拟光标更新至所述第三触控坐标;The click input subunit is configured to receive the cursor displacement event sent by the first touch module of the first operating system, and update the virtual cursor in the second operating system to the third Touch coordinates;
    所述光标分类单元,用于识别更新至所述第三触控坐标时所述虚拟光标的光标样式,并基于所述光标样式确定所述第三触控坐标对应的区域类型;The cursor classification unit is used to identify the cursor style of the virtual cursor when updating to the third touch coordinates, and determine the area type corresponding to the third touch coordinates based on the cursor style;
    所述光标分类单元,还用于将所述区域类型发送给所述第一操作系统内的所述第一触控模块。The cursor classification unit is also used to send the area type to the first touch module in the first operating system.
  30. 根据权利要求15-29任一项所述的系统,其特征在于,所述第一操作系统包括:启动操作接收单元、应用启动单元以及界面显示单元;所述第二操作系统包括:界面反馈单元;The system according to any one of claims 15 to 29, characterized in that the first operating system includes: a startup operation receiving unit, an application startup unit and an interface display unit; the second operating system includes: an interface feedback unit ;
    启动操作接收单元,用于接收用户在所述第一操作系统中发起对于所述预设应用的启动操作;A startup operation receiving unit configured to receive a user's startup operation for the preset application in the first operating system;
    应用启动单元,用于通过安装于所述第一操作系统中的代理应用向所述第二操作系统发起应用启动指令;所述应用启动指令携带有所述预设应用的应用标识;An application startup unit configured to initiate an application startup instruction to the second operating system through a proxy application installed in the first operating system; the application startup instruction carries the application identifier of the preset application;
    界面反馈单元,用于响应所述应用启动指令,在所述第二操作系统内运行所述预设应用,并将所述预设应用的操作界面反馈给所述代理应用; An interface feedback unit, configured to respond to the application startup instruction, run the preset application in the second operating system, and feed back the operation interface of the preset application to the proxy application;
    界面显示单元,用于通过所述代理应用在所述第一操作系统内生成所述操作界面。An interface display unit is configured to generate the operation interface in the first operating system through the proxy application.
  31. 一种电子设备,其特征在于,所述电子设备包括存储器、处理器以及存储在所述存储器中并可在所述处理器上运行的计算机程序,所述处理器执行所述计算机程序时如权利要求1至14任一项所述方法的步骤。An electronic device, characterized in that the electronic device includes a memory, a processor, and a computer program stored in the memory and executable on the processor. When the processor executes the computer program, the computer program is as described in the claim. The steps of the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14.
  32. 一种计算机可读存储介质,所述计算机可读存储介质存储有计算机程序,其特征在于,所述计算机程序被处理器执行时实现如权利要求1至14任一项所述方法的步骤。 A computer-readable storage medium stores a computer program, characterized in that when the computer program is executed by a processor, the steps of the method according to any one of claims 1 to 14 are implemented.
PCT/CN2023/113141 2022-08-19 2023-08-15 Touch input method, system, electronic device, and storage medium WO2024037542A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211009728.1A CN117631939A (en) 2022-08-19 2022-08-19 Touch input method, system, electronic equipment and storage medium
CN202211009728.1 2022-08-19

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2024037542A1 true WO2024037542A1 (en) 2024-02-22

Family

ID=89940737

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2023/113141 WO2024037542A1 (en) 2022-08-19 2023-08-15 Touch input method, system, electronic device, and storage medium

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN117631939A (en)
WO (1) WO2024037542A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050125779A1 (en) * 2002-01-10 2005-06-09 Microsoft Corporation Cross-platform software development with a software development peripheral
CN111277670A (en) * 2020-03-09 2020-06-12 西安万像电子科技有限公司 Remote control system and method
CN112231001A (en) * 2020-10-14 2021-01-15 佛吉亚歌乐电子(佛山)有限公司 Vehicle dual-system compatible control method and system, storage medium and vehicle-mounted terminal
CN114327137A (en) * 2021-12-23 2022-04-12 宁波均联智行科技股份有限公司 Touch method and device based on multiple vehicle-mounted operating systems and computer equipment
CN116339877A (en) * 2021-12-24 2023-06-27 华为技术有限公司 Method for running application program across systems and electronic equipment

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050125779A1 (en) * 2002-01-10 2005-06-09 Microsoft Corporation Cross-platform software development with a software development peripheral
CN111277670A (en) * 2020-03-09 2020-06-12 西安万像电子科技有限公司 Remote control system and method
CN112231001A (en) * 2020-10-14 2021-01-15 佛吉亚歌乐电子(佛山)有限公司 Vehicle dual-system compatible control method and system, storage medium and vehicle-mounted terminal
CN114327137A (en) * 2021-12-23 2022-04-12 宁波均联智行科技股份有限公司 Touch method and device based on multiple vehicle-mounted operating systems and computer equipment
CN116339877A (en) * 2021-12-24 2023-06-27 华为技术有限公司 Method for running application program across systems and electronic equipment

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN117631939A (en) 2024-03-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102470275B1 (en) Voice control method and electronic device
WO2021129326A1 (en) Screen display method and electronic device
WO2021103981A1 (en) Split-screen display processing method and apparatus, and electronic device
EP4030422A1 (en) Voice interaction method and device
WO2021036571A1 (en) Desktop editing method and electronic device
WO2020134869A1 (en) Electronic device operating method and electronic device
WO2021213164A1 (en) Application interface interaction method, electronic device, and computer readable storage medium
WO2021082835A1 (en) Method for activating function and electronic device
WO2021036770A1 (en) Split-screen processing method and terminal device
WO2022068483A1 (en) Application startup method and apparatus, and electronic device
WO2022068819A1 (en) Interface display method and related apparatus
WO2021078032A1 (en) User interface display method and electronic device
WO2020107463A1 (en) Electronic device control method and electronic device
WO2023241209A1 (en) Desktop wallpaper configuration method and apparatus, electronic device and readable storage medium
CN112068907A (en) Interface display method and electronic equipment
CN113986070A (en) Quick viewing method for application card and electronic equipment
US20230236714A1 (en) Cross-Device Desktop Management Method, First Electronic Device, and Second Electronic Device
WO2021190524A1 (en) Screenshot processing method, graphic user interface and terminal
WO2021042878A1 (en) Photography method and electronic device
WO2023029916A1 (en) Annotation display method and apparatus, terminal device, and readable storage medium
WO2022002213A1 (en) Translation result display method and apparatus, and electronic device
WO2024037542A1 (en) Touch input method, system, electronic device, and storage medium
WO2024109481A1 (en) Window control method and electronic device
WO2023226922A1 (en) Widget management method, electronic device, and computer-readable storage medium
WO2023207799A1 (en) Message processing method and electronic device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 23854443

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1